JP2020014919A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of excellently controlling a game transferring across a plurality of game states.SOLUTION: In the case where a short-term time shortening game state occurs, when one-time variable display which reaches an upper limit (upper limit game frequency) of a time shortening frequency at the start is reserved, variable display is started right after the short-term time shortening game state starts, a time shortening state flag is off at a timing at which to start performing the variable display, and control of a right start winning device 432 is changed to control (entry normal control) corresponding to a non-time shortening state from control (entry easy control) corresponding to the time shortening state. Thus, in the short-term time shortening game state, a player can concentrate on variable display during execution and display of result information without entry operation of game balls into a game area.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine.

  In a conventional gaming machine, during a normal gaming state, a game ball enters the starting opening to be a start winning, a variable display is executed, and if a lottery is won by a lottery based on the starting winning, a big hit is won. There is known a configuration in which a special game state is set after a corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the special game state, a large number of game balls can be won in a winning opening. Further, in this type of gaming machine, when another start winning is generated during execution of the variable display based on the start winning, the execution of the variable display for the other start winning can be suspended up to a predetermined maximum number of times. A configuration having a hold function is also known. Furthermore, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, the winning probability of a big hit becomes a probable changing gaming state higher than the ordinary gaming state, or the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the starting port from the ordinary gaming state. There is also known a game in which such a game state can be continued up to a predetermined upper limit of the number of games, thereby diversifying the game.

JP 2005-074175 A

  In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the control of the game that transitions between a plurality of types of gaming states.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide, for example, a gaming machine capable of suitably executing a game control that transitions between a plurality of types of gaming states.

The gaming machine according to the present invention, in order to solve the above problems,
A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball flows through a predetermined entrance,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied;
A display device capable of performing variable display when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displaying result information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery after the variable display;
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable display by the display device, a holding unit capable of holding the execution of the variable display for the satisfaction of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times,
A first starting unit that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters,
A second starting unit that takes a plurality of states where the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and satisfies the second predetermined condition when the game ball enters;
A variable winning section that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters,
Game state control means for generating at least a plurality of types of game states by controlling at least the ease of entry of the game balls in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game balls in the variable winning portion,
As the gaming state,
A normal gaming state in which the first starting section establishes the first predetermined condition and plays a game;
A prize-winning gaming state that includes a period in which the variable prize portion takes a state in which a gaming ball easily enters, generated when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal gaming state;
Including one or more variable display executed after the winning easy gaming state and displaying the result information after the one or more variable display, the result information corresponding to the non-winning of the predetermined lottery is predetermined. In the gaming state where the game state transits to another gaming state when displayed until the upper limit number of games is reached, and when the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery winning is displayed as the result information, the normal gaming state is displayed. An advantageous gaming state in which a transitioning gaming state after the result information is displayed is determined by a condition that makes it easier for the player to transition to an advantageous gaming state than the first predetermined condition is satisfied,
The game state control means,
Normal entry control for controlling the ease of entry of a game ball into the second starting portion during the normal game state, and a game ball entering the second start portion from the normal game state during the advantageous game state. Easy access control to generate an easy access easy state,
When the fluctuation display of the number of times reaching the upper limit number of games is performed in the advantageous game state, the easy entry of the game ball to the second starting portion is controlled by the normal entry control,
At the start of the advantageous gaming state, when the execution of the variable display is suspended in the suspension means, and when the suspension display is not suspended, different control is performed,
When the execution of the variable display is not suspended in the suspension means at the start of the advantageous gaming state, the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the easy entry control, and the advantageous gaming state is controlled. When the game ball enters the second starting unit after the start of the first variation display, the first variation display is started, and immediately after the start of the first variation display or until a certain time has elapsed from the start of the first variation display. During the period, the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the easy entry control, and after the period has elapsed and before the first variable display ends, the normal entry The ease with which the game ball enters the second starting portion is controlled by the control.

  With the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute a control of a game that transitions between a plurality of types of gaming states.

Front perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in an open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state. A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state. Front view of pachinko machine Front view of pachinko machine with front block removed Front view of gaming board Back side perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flow chart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Exploded perspective view of the central structure Enlarged view of area E1 in FIG. Perspective view of the top plate decoration, upper left front decoration, and upper right front decoration viewed from the back side Partial sectional view of the central structure The figure which looked at the partial sectional view of FIG. 16 from the front. Front view of central structure Diagram explaining the shape of the downflow passage Enlarged view of area E2 in FIG. Diagram explaining the upper and lower stages Exploded perspective view of a game board Front view of movable body Diagram showing the case where the movable body is placed at the initial position The figure which shows the case where a movable body is arrange | positioned at the fluctuation | variation display position. The figure which shows the case where a movable body is arrange | positioned in an intermediate position. Diagram showing the case where the movable body is arranged at the irradiation position Diagram showing the relationship between the special symbol lottery content and the transitioning gaming state Flow chart showing progress control of a game state Timing chart showing the control of the main control board at the start of the short time-saving game state Flowchart showing operation notification control processing by the sub-control board

  With regard to the embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball game machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described, followed by a description of a modified example and other types of gaming machines. First, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in order.

<Structural configuration>
First, the configuration of the structural part of the pachinko machine 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 2 shows a front block 102 and an intermediate block 103 integrated with an outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Is shown. FIG. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 has been removed from the state of FIG. In addition, various wirings are omitted in each drawing, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, for example, as shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displaceable.

  The outer frame 101 has a function as main body support means for supporting the main body of the pachinko machine 100. The outer frame 101 is, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, a substantially quadrangular frame body in which a top plate 111, a bottom plate 112, a left plate 113, and a right plate 114 are assembled. And is firmly fixed by fixtures (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the outer frame 101 or the main body corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101. A structure in which a supporting mechanism for supporting and a part of a locking mechanism for locking a main body thereof is provided in the island facility may be adopted.

  Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end (left side) in the left-right direction when the pachinko machine 100 is viewed from the front. It is configured to be rotatable forward with the base end side and the other end side (right side) as the rotation tip side.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the outer frame 101, for example, as shown in FIG. In each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, for example, a shaft provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support provided in the outer frame 101, and a shaft hole provided in the shaft support is provided. Is configured to be rotatable by being inserted. The configuration in which the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is rotatable is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side, and a shaft portion is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined detachment operation, and the main body of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. On the other hand, it is detachably attached. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 to the outer frame 101 by a predetermined amount or more and moving the intermediate block 103 upward by a predetermined amount. You. Thus, the main body of the pachinko machine 100 can be detached from the outer frame 101.

  On the front side of the intermediate block 103, the front block 102 is disposed so as to overlap, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side in front view. The front block supporting mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block supporting mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 to be rotatable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove the front block 102 by a predetermined removing operation. It is configured to be possible.

  The rear block 104 is disposed on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 so as to overlap with the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are arranged by rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 to be rotatable rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. In addition, it is configured to be detachably supported by a predetermined detachment operation.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that regulates opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that regulates opening and closing of the front block 102 with respect to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front block locking mechanism. A lock operating mechanism operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism is provided. As shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operation mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

  When a clockwise rotation operation using an operation key (not shown) is performed as a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 operates. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 and the movable portion 143 provided on the outer frame 101 as a part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is released, and the intermediate block 103 is opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

  On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided on the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to a left rotation operation of the key cylinder 141 by a predetermined operation key. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 145 and the movable portion 144 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism is released, and the front block 102 is opened and closed with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism for restricting opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. By the rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism, the rear block 104 can be switched between a state in which opening and closing are prohibited (opening / closing prohibited state) and a state in which opening and closing are permitted (opening / closing permitted state) with respect to the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined operation. It has been.

  The rear block opening / closing restricting mechanism includes, for example, two open / close restricting portions 150A and 150B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one open / close restricting portion 150C provided in the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. . These three opening / closing restricting portions 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change their engagement states with the opening portions arranged to be overlapped in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 by the rotation operation. And an openable / closeable posture corresponding to the openable / closeable state. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are set to the opening / closing allowance posture, each of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the opening, and the rear block 104 is allowed to open / close with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open / close prohibition posture and the open / close permissible posture may be switched between the open / close prohibition state and the open / close permissible state by changing at least one of the positions and directions of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. It may be configured to move in a fixed direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to a change in posture when a component member in each device shifts between a plurality of postures.

  Of the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed on the rear block 104 in the open / close prohibition state of the rear block 104, as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C, which is exposed through the opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and corresponds to the remaining portion, is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103, as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the openable / closable posture only by operating from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103. Has been raised.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement regulating mechanism for regulating the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. The game ball movement regulation mechanism is configured by, for example, a combination of a flow-down regulation piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a regulation change section 162 provided in the front block 102, as shown in FIGS. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is configured to be biased by a coil spring (not shown) to the front side where the front block 102 is located.

  In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (the closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down regulating piece 161 is in a movement-permissible state in which a game ball is allowed to flow down. The change unit 162 presses and pushes the rear side of the intermediate block 103. The flow-down regulating piece 161 is arranged to be shifted rearward with respect to a guide path (not shown) for guiding a game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement allowable state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is allowed.

  On the other hand, in a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (an open state of the front block 102), the pressing of the flow-down regulating piece 161 by the regulation changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. As a result, a movement-prohibiting state in which the flow-down regulating piece 161 projects toward the front block 102 is set. The downflow restricting piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the downflow of the game ball to the downstream side. Thereby, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the previous block 102 is prohibited.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the pachinko machine 100 has the intermediate block 103 closed with respect to the outer frame 101, for example, at the lower end of the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (left side in rear view). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the operation is performed is provided. Also, as shown in FIG. 3, for example, the intermediate block 103 is provided at the lower end on the front side of the intermediate block 103 and at the rotation front end (right side in front view). An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed is provided for 103.

  Next, each configuration of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the rear block 104 will be described in order.

 As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 forms a substantially entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100, is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates a front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It has a function as a front decoration means. The front block 102 mainly includes a base frame 201 made of a synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components before and after the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 forming the front side of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A formed including the central portion of the front block 102 in front view. It is attached to. In a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 constituting the front block 102 are combined, the opening 210A is formed to penetrate in a front-rear direction over a wide area excluding the outer peripheral portion to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. Through this opening 210A, the intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, An auxiliary storage mechanism 240 for storing game balls, and a firing operation device 250 operated by a player to fire the game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 are provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 includes, as a part of the front decorative body 210, an opening peripheral portion 211 surrounding the periphery of the opening 210A, and a front protruding portion below the opening 210A. An upper protruding portion 217, a lower protruding portion 218 positioned below the upper protruding portion 217 and protruding forward, and an upper protruding portion 217 and a lower protruding portion on the right side of the lower protruding portion 218. A flat portion 219 formed of a substantially flat region located on the back side of the projection operation device 218 and on which the firing operation device 250 is arranged is formed. The main storage mechanism 230 is disposed on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is disposed on the lower protrusion 218.

  The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visible while closing the opening 210A formed through in the front-rear direction when the base frame 201 and the front decoration body 210 are combined. The center panel 220 has, for example, a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201 and a light-transmitting light fitted into the front side of the panel frame 221 as shown in FIGS. And a light-transmissive rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially in parallel with the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap behind the panel frame 221. I have.

  The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing the game balls obtained according to the progress of the game and the game balls lent from the game hall. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage unit 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 has an inlet 231A for allowing game balls to flow into the storage unit 231 from the inside of the pachinko machine 100, and an outlet (not shown) for allowing game balls to flow from the storage unit 231 to the inside of the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream of the outlet is provided. By opening the release port, the game ball is released from the storage section 231 to the player without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removing mechanism has a function of switching the destination of the game ball between the outlet and the outlet.

  The game balls obtained in accordance with the progress of the game and the game balls lent in response to a lending operation performed on a lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inlet 231A. The storage section 231 has an opening formed on the upper side, through which game balls owned by the player are manually inserted, or game balls lent out at the game hall are supplied.

  The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a line. When the ball removing operation (for example, pressing operation) on the ball removing operation member 232 is not performed, the game ball is guided to a launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through the outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removing operation is being performed on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes a storage part 241 having inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and a discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and a discharge port 241B. The ball removing mechanism 243 for operating the ball removing mechanism 243 is provided. The game balls or the like acquired according to the progress of the game mainly flow into the main storage mechanism 230, but flow into the storage section 241 through the inflow port 241A when the storage section 231 is full. In addition, even in response to the ball removing operation on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C.

  The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the release port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) on the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball-pulling operation member 242 by the ball-pulling operation member 242, the release port 241B is kept in the open state until the ball-pulling operation member 242 is returned (for example, a pressing operation again). Will be maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage portion 241 is provided behind the inflow port 241A.

  The firing operation device 250 includes, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, a pedestal 251 protruding forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decoration 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) that detects the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) that detects that a player is in contact with the firing handle 252, A firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) for disabling the ejection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the operation of the player. When the firing handle 252 is rotated by the player, game balls are emitted from the firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) at an intensity corresponding to the amount of the rotation operation. Note that when the contact sensor 254 has not detected contact between the firing handle 252 and the player, or when the firing operation has been disabled by operating the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 has been rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the firing device 330.

  Further, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided behind the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap with the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decoration 210 on the back side, and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge 211 includes an upper central edge 211A, a left upper edge 211B and an upper right edge 211C located on the left and right sides of the upper central edge 211A, and a left upper edge. A left edge portion 211D located below the upper edge portion 211B and a right edge portion 211E located below the upper right edge portion 211C as light emitting portions. Devices 271 to 275 are provided.

  The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper center edge 211A, an upper left frame light emitting device 272 corresponding to the upper left edge 211B, and an upper right frame light emitting corresponding to the upper right edge 211C. It comprises a device 273, a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 has one or a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) as light emitting means, electronic components such as resistors for controlling the LEDs, and integrates and electrically connects these electronic components. And a printed circuit board.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with, for example, an upper left sound output port 211F and an upper right sound output port 211G above the opening peripheral portion 211 thereof. An upper left sound device 281 and an upper right sound device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to the upper right sound output port 211G and the upper right sound output port 211G, respectively. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located at the back (rear) of the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210.

  In the front block 102, as shown in FIG. 1, for example, a game ball lending device 290 is provided on the upper right side of the upper protruding portion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the balance of bills, cards, and the like inserted in a card unit (not shown) arranged alongside the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending. A lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the game, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, and the like inserted into the card unit. When a bill or a card is inserted into the card unit and a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which numerical values corresponding to the amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. In response, a predetermined number of game balls are lent from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated with the rent of the game balls. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, a card in which a banknote equivalent or a balance corresponding to the balance is recorded is returned from the card unit in accordance with the return operation.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 that allows a player to perform an input operation different from a firing operation. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a pressing operation device 261 that can perform a pressing operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up, down, left, and right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, a device setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player-related operation It is possible to execute an effect setting operation or the like for inputting information and executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the previous game, and these operations can be executed by the player or the manager of the game arcade as necessary. It has been. Note that an input operation unit (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) with which the player contacts the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down, or driven by input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid. It is preferable that the operation such as vibration is configured to be executable by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation, or By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanying the input operation, such as actively prompting the input operation.

  Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and has a function of attaching the front block 102 and the rear block 104 to integrate the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including a game board 400 to a base frame 301.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) which is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame. A game board support mechanism for rotatably and detachably supporting the game board 400 with respect to 301, a game board fixing mechanism for fixing the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. A firing device 330 (see FIG. 3) for emitting, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) mounted on the back side of the game board 400 to control the game progress comprehensively, and based on commands from the main control device 370. A sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effects and state notification.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the base frame 301 includes a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding game balls discharged from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed. A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B where the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wirings inserted through the opening 301B are formed of various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271). 275, the upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282) and devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rear block 104. Including the wiring, the signal relay device 311 has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 has a flat base 401 having a through hole through which game balls such as an outlet 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that smoothly curves from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. 402, an inner rail 403 smoothly curved from the lower right to the upper left of the base 401, a return ball preventing mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and an upper right end of the outer rail 402. And a recoil prevention member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball fired from a firing device 330 described later into a game area. The return ball preventing mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once discharged into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed between the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 facing in parallel to return to the launch passage 401B. The anti-recoil member 405 has a shock-absorbing property to prevent a large rebound of the game ball such that a game ball heading to the right over the upper center of the game board 400 returns to the left through the upper center again. For example, it is formed of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage 163 is formed in a lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the outer rail 402 and the guide member 335 that guides the game ball from the firing device 330 in the direction of the firing path 401B, and is fired from the firing device 330 but not beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning in the passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inflow port 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 disposed below the gap.

  The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area and moves (falls down) in the game area while dropping by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape in which a region having a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball is mostly used. The outer periphery of the game area is generally defined by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, the front side is defined by the rear plate 223 of the central panel 220, and the rear side is defined by the base 401 of the game board 400. Is divided into In addition, various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 includes a ball feed mechanism 331 that sequentially sends game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to a firing position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (see FIG. 10). ), A firing mechanism 333 that ejects a game ball disposed at a firing position, a firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a game ball fired from the firing mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing passage 401B. The firing device 330 operates in response to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 as described above, and the driving control of the firing solenoid 334 changes according to the firing operation on the firing operation device 250 to adjust the firing force.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a two-part board case 371 that houses the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so as not to be opened without leaving a trace.

  The main controller 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, a mounting portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the back side of the base 401 of the game board 400, and the main control device 370 is mounted on the mounting portion 372. Thus, not only the rear side (front side) of the main controller 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main controller 370 by rotating the mounting portion 372, the main controller 370 is attached to the gaming board 400. It can be easily checked with the camera attached. Main controller 370 may be connected to attachment portion 372 such that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the state of removal of main controller 370 may be easily managed.

  The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10), and a board case 391 having a split structure for accommodating the sub-control board 940. The sub-control board 940 is, for example, like the main control board 920, and is housed in a light-transmitting board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace. It is attached to the back side.

  Here, various structures arranged in the game area in the game board 400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400. In FIG. 7, illustration of a movable body 710 (see FIG. 22) described later is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base 401, a downflow changing member such as a nail 411 or a windmill 412 that changes the downflow direction or downflow speed of the game ball, and a center arranged at a substantially center of the base 401. The structure 420, a starting device (specifically, a lower middle starting winning device 431) according to a first special symbol disposed below the central structure 420, and a right side with respect to the central structure 420. A starting device (specifically, a right starting winning device 432) related to a second special symbol arranged on the lower side, and a large winning device 433, 434 (specifically, a downstream device) disposed downstream of the right starting winning device 432. Are the right large winning device 433 and the central large winning device 434), the starting device 436 related to the ordinary symbols arranged above (upstream side) the right starting winning device 432, and the upper right side of the gaming board 400 Of the special winning devices 433 and 434 Includes a useful communication actuator 435 disposed on the upstream side, Chuo regular winning device 439A which is disposed on the left and right sides of the winning device 434, and a 439B Te. The game board 400 includes an upper middle start winning device 632 disposed on the upper middle start winning device 632 and functioning in the same manner as the right start winning device 432 as a start device for the second special symbol, and a central structure 420. There is a general winning device 639 arranged on the left side and functioning similarly to the general winning devices 439A and 439B.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-described lower middle starting winning device 431 (see FIG. 10). The entry of the game ball into the predetermined area is detected. For example, a first start prize switch (first start prize switch 441) that detects a game ball that has entered the lower middle start prize device 431, and a second start prize switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right start prize device 432 ( A second starting winning switch 442), a second starting winning switch (second starting winning switch 642) for detecting a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632, and a right detecting a game ball entering the right big winning device 433. The big win switch 443, the central big win switch 444 that detects a game ball that has entered the central big win device 434, the role activation switch 445 that detects a game ball that has entered the role activation device 435, and the game that has entered the start device 436. A start switch 446 for detecting a ball, and a non-specific feature for detecting a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the right special winning device 433. A passage switch 447, a specific passage switch 448 that detects a game ball that has entered a specific passage (not shown) formed inside the right big winning device 433, and a game ball that has entered a general winning device 439A, 439B. General prize switches 449A and 449B, general prize switches 649 for detecting game balls entering the general prize device 639, and the like are provided on the game board 400.

  The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starting device 436 forms a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged to the game area. Each prize device, specifically, the lower middle start prize device 431, the right start prize device 432, the upper middle start prize device 632, the right large prize device 433, the central large prize device 434, and the general prize devices 439A, 439B, 639. The entrance portion of the game ball constitutes a winning opening, and the game ball entering each winning opening passes through a through-hole formed in the base 401, and a collection / discharge passage formed on the back side of the base 401 (shown in FIG. 7). ). The game balls that have not entered each of the winning devices are guided to a collection / discharge passage through a discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection and discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). Each prize device may be configured separately from other prize devices, or a device in which two or more prize devices (for example, a lower middle start prize device 431 and an upper middle start prize device 632) are integrated. A winning device may be constituted by the above, and the starting device such as the lower middle starting winning device 431 does not necessarily have to be a winning opening in which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when a game ball enters, It is good also as an entrance for a game ball to be discharged again to a game field without being paid out.

  The lower middle starting winning device 431 according to the first special symbol and the upper middle starting winning device 632 according to the second special symbol, and the general winning device 439A, the general winning device 439B, and the general winning device 639 are respectively provided to them. The entering game ball is guided to the rear side of the base 401 without changing the entry probability of the game ball. Further, the right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof. In addition, the mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball does not need to be provided only in the right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol. Instead, or in addition, the first special symbol or the second special symbol. May be provided in any one or more of the starting device and the general winning devices 439A, 439B, 639. Further, the mechanism for changing the probability of entry of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid or the like, and is represented by a mechanism operated by the weight of the game ball entering the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operates mechanically.

  The right starting winning device 432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 452 for changing the probability of a game ball entering the inside thereof by a transition between an entry permitted attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and a right entry restriction mechanism. 452 (see FIG. 10). The right entry control mechanism 452 includes a movable piece driven by the right entry control solenoid 462. When the right entry control mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibited position, the movable piece closes the entrance (winning opening). The game ball cannot enter the right starting winning device 432 by taking the arrangement, but when the right approach regulation mechanism 452 is in the entry allowable posture, the movable piece is arranged to guide the game ball into the entrance, thereby playing the game. The ball can enter the right starting winning device 432. The right entry restriction mechanism 452, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 related to a normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”), enters the right approach In accordance with the drive by the regulating solenoid 462, the state is shifted to the approach allowable posture for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the right large prize device 433 includes a right entry restriction mechanism 453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the entry permitted position and a prohibited entry position, and a right entry restriction, as shown in FIG. The right approach restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the attitude of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guided attitude and the guided attitude cause the game ball that has entered the right special winning device 433 to enter the non-specific passage or the specific passage. A distributing mechanism (not shown) for distributing, and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for changing a posture of the distributing mechanism to switch a guide destination of the game ball are provided. When the right entry control mechanism 453 of the right large winning device 433 is in the entry prohibited position, the right entry control mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning opening), so that the game ball cannot enter the right large entry device 433. On the other hand, when the right entry restriction mechanism 453 is in the entry allowable posture, the game ball can enter the right big winning device 433 by the right entry restriction mechanism 453 opening the entrance. In addition, the game ball that has entered the right large winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific passage when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture projecting forward, and is in a guided posture in which the distribution mechanism is immersed rearward. Is guided to a specific passage. The specific path, the non-specific path, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the transition of the game state, and when the game ball enters the specific path, an advantageous game state is given to the player as a privilege. .

  As shown in FIG. 7, the central large winning device 434 has a central entry restriction mechanism 454 that restricts the entry of a game ball into the entrance permitted position and a prohibited entry position, and a central entry restriction, as shown in FIG. 7. A central entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) for changing the attitude of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the central entry control mechanism 454 is in the entry-prohibited position, the game ball cannot enter the central special prize device 434 by closing the entrance (winning opening), but the central entry control mechanism 454 is used. Is in the entry allowable attitude, the central entry control mechanism 454 opens the entry port, so that the game ball can enter the central special winning device 434.

  In addition, as the entry allowable posture and the entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the probability of entry of a game ball into the inside such as the right entry control mechanism 452, the winning opening (or entrance opening) of each device is constituted by each mechanism. In response to a change in the posture of the operating member that switches between a special state in which the game ball can enter and a normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operating member differs depending on each posture. I just want it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the entry probability of the game ball, such as the right approach restriction mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the state in which the game ball cannot enter to the normal state, and to allow the game ball to enter even in the normal state. In the state, the posture of the operation member may be changed to a state in which the game ball is more likely to enter than in the normal state.

  A game ball can enter the right special prize device 433 and the central special prize device 434 when a winning lottery is won. Specifically, the lottery based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the lower middle starting winning device 431 relating to the first special symbol by the first starting winning switch 441 (hereinafter also referred to as “first special symbol lottery”). ), Or that the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 or the upper middle starting winning device 632 according to the second special symbol is detected by the second starting winning switch 442 or the second starting winning switch 642. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”), at least one of the right approaching solenoid 463 or the center approaching solenoid 464 is operated. By this operation, at least one of the right approach control mechanism 453 and the central approach control mechanism 454 takes the approach permitting posture for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined number of times. Further, the distributing mechanism shifts to the guiding posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the transition of the right approach regulating mechanism 453 to the entry allowable posture, and further switches after a predetermined time from the transition to the guiding posture. Returning to the non-guidance posture in response to the stop of the solenoid 465.

  The winning combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the right large winning device 433 and the central large winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the jackpot lottery, either of the right big winning device 433 or the central big winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the gaming ball of the combination operating device 435 passes. For this reason, when a big hit is won, the player can start the special game state at a timing intended by the player. It should be noted that it is not always necessary that either the right large winning device 433 or the central large winning device 434 starts operating on condition that the gaming ball passes through the combination operating device 435. Instead or instead of this, In addition, the configuration may be such that either the right special winning device 433 or the central special winning device 434 starts operating after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 7, the display board 471 to 473 for displaying the symbol change display and the lottery result, and the display apparatuses 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times the game is held are integrated on the gaming board 400, as shown in FIG. A display having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are partitioned in advance into light emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed by the light emitting state.

  Specifically, on the gaming board 400, the first special symbol is fluctuated and displayed along with the first special symbol lottery, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 471 relating to a special symbol, and a second symbol for variably displaying the second special symbol in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, or displaying the second special symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. A special symbol display device 472 relating to the special symbol, a special symbol reservation display device 476 for displaying the number of hold times of the unit game relating to the first special symbol, and a special symbol hold displaying the number of hold times of the unit game relating to the second special symbol A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are respectively held up to four times. Here, the unit game is one game executed based on one start winning, and is determined based on whether the lottery executed based on one start winning is determined or not, and the lottery is determined based on the winning determination. This refers to a series of games including the start and end of the variable display until the result is displayed.

  When the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the lower middle starting winning device 431 is detected by the first starting winning switch 441 (see FIG. 10). In this case, the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 or the upper middle starting winning device 632 is switched to the second starting winning switch 442 or the second starting winning switch 432. Even if it is detected by the 2 start winning switch 642 (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game relating to the second special symbol is not added.

  Each of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units (a combination of light emitting states (light off, light on, blink) including light emitting colors). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol determine the number of times of holding by the combination of the light emitting states (off, light, blink) of the two monochromatic light emitting units. indicate.

  In addition, on the game board 400, a normal symbol display device 473 for changing and displaying a normal symbol or displaying a fixed symbol with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result in accordance with the ordinary symbol lottery, and A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of times the unit game right is held is provided. The right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to four times. If the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the unit game right related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

  The ordinary symbol display device 473 includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Usually, a symbol is represented by a light emitting pattern of a plurality of light emitting units. In addition, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of times of holding based on a combination of the light emitting states (off, on, blinking) of the two monochromatic light emitting units.

  Also, on the game board 400, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner or the decorative symbols are fixedly displayed in the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420. A decorative symbol display device 479 is provided. The variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the sub control board 940, and are synchronized with the variable display and the fixed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variation display of the decorative symbol, more complex and diverse effects are executed than in the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variable display and the fixed display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variable display and the fixed display of the decorative symbol always start changing at exactly the same timing or stop display as the fixed display. There is no need to set the timing so that the fluctuation is started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the final display is performed at substantially the same timing.

  Further, the game board 400 includes a board light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board light emitting device 490 is associated with the progress of the game based on control by the sub-control board 940. Various light emission effects and status notification by light emission are executed.

  Here, various game states and transitions between the game states will be described. The normal gaming state (hereinafter also abbreviated as “normal gaming state”) is a state in which the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol have a long variable display time (hereinafter also referred to as “non-time saving state”). Corresponding.

  The first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are set so as to win a jackpot with substantially the same probability. For example, the jackpot is won at approximately 1/23. When a big hit is won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, either the right large winning device 433 or the central large winning device 434 starts operating, and the player goes to the winning opening. , A special game state in which a prize ball is easily obtained by winning is generated. The number of award balls that can be obtained in one big hit is set differently depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is won or the second special symbol lottery. For example, when the first special symbol lottery is won, a certain prize ball (for example, approximately 150 pieces) can be obtained with a probability of approximately 77%, and a prize ball is obtained with no remaining prize with a probability of approximately 23%. Can not. When the second special symbol lottery is won, a large number of prize balls (for example, approximately 250 pieces) are set with a probability of approximately 25% in that it is easier to obtain a large number of prize balls than in the first special symbol lottery. It is possible to obtain a small number of prize balls (for example, approximately 150) with a remaining 75% probability.

  In addition, when a big hit is won in either the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game shifts to a time-saving game state with a preset probability. The probability of shifting to the time-saving gaming state is set differently depending on whether the first special symbol lottery is won or the second special symbol lottery, and is set differently depending on the gaming state in which the winning has occurred. For example, when the first special symbol lottery is won, the game shifts to the time-saving game state at approximately 30% in the normal game state and 100% in the time-saving game state, and the second special symbol lottery is won. In this case, the game is set to be easier to shift to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery, and the game shifts to the time-saving gaming state at 100% regardless of the gaming state.

  The time saving game state is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the ordinary symbol is shorter than the non-time saving state, and a big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. The winning probability is the same state as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as “low probability state”). Further, the time-saving gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, once or 87 times), and thereafter returns to the normal gaming state. . The total number of unit games in which the time-saving game state continues (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of time savings) differs depending on whether the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is won, and the winning occurs. The setting is different depending on the playing state. For example, when the first special symbol lottery is won, if the lottery is in the normal gaming state, one time reduction is selected with a probability of approximately 70%, and one time reduction is selected with a probability of approximately 30%. Is done. In addition, when the first special symbol lottery is won during the time saving game state, and when the second special symbol lottery is won during the normal game state and the time saving game state, the first special symbol lottery is performed during the normal game state. Is set so that it is easier to select the number of time savings than in the case of winning, and the number of time savings 87 times is selected with a probability of 100%. Note that details of the settings relating to the transition control of the game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 28 and the like.

  In the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, a small lottery is also executed separately from the big hit. If a small hit is not won, a small hit may be won. If a small hit is won, the right big winning device 433 is activated for a short time (for example, about 0.1 second). Take an approach-permissible attitude. It corresponds to whether or not the game ball enters a specific passage (a part of the passage provided inside the right special winning device 433) during a period in which the right special winning device 433 is operated based on the winning of a small hit. Then, whether or not to provide a gaming state advantageous to the player is different. For example, when a game ball enters a specific passage, the right large winning device 433 starts operating again as an advantageous game state, and the entry allowable posture is set for a predetermined time (for example, approximately 1.8 seconds). Take. When a game ball enters a specific passage in the second and subsequent operations of the right big prize device 433 after winning a small hit, the right to operate the right big prize device 433 again is given, and this operation is performed. The process is continued until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, three times).

  Here, the advantageous game state when the game ball enters the specific passage is not limited to the configuration by the operation of the right big winning device 433 again, but instead or additionally, another advantageous game state A state may be given. For example, a gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as a “high probability state”) in which the time is in a state of reduced working hours and the winning probability of a big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than the normal gaming state. At the same time, also referred to as a “probable change game state”), and may be maintained until the total number of unit games relating to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, once or 87 times). good.

  The transition between the gaming state and the gaming state is not necessarily required to have the above-described configuration, and may include a gaming state that is different from each of the gaming states described above. It is good also as composition which changes between game states.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described generally in chronological order. On the main control board 920, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number, a stop pattern random number, and various fluctuation pattern random numbers relating to a special symbol (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated. When a game ball that has entered the lower middle starting winning device 431 related to the first special symbol is detected by the first starting winning switch 441 (see FIG. 10), the first special symbol is started. At the time of the start winning of the first special symbol, if the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol is not held up to the maximum number of times, a winning random number, a big hit symbol random number and a stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are obtained, It is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920.

  The unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state, is not the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and is the unit game related to the first special symbol. If no rights are reserved, it will start immediately after storing these random numbers. In addition, even when the special game state is not in progress, the unit game pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the unit game right pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved. The unit game based on the starting winning prize starts after the unit gaming related to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current prize is completed. When each random number is acquired based on the winning start of the first special symbol during the special game state, the unit game based on the random number is all of the units held before the current start winning after the special game state. It starts after the unit game related to the special symbol.

  Further, the unit game based on the random number acquired based on the winning winning of the first special symbol is started after all the unit games related to the second special symbol are completed. That is, when each random number is acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol after the current start winning, the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. The unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol does not necessarily have to be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are sequentially arranged in the order of the starting winning. May be executed, or the two special symbols may be changed simultaneously instead of being selected.

  If a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery based on the winning winning of the first special symbol, a stop symbol (corresponding to the big hit lottery of the first special symbol lottery based on the acquired big hit symbol random number) The type of big hit symbol) is determined. The type of the stop symbol corresponds to the type of the big hit, for example, the number of rounds (for example, three rounds, four rounds, and five rounds) corresponding to the number of times the right approaching control mechanism 453 or the central approaching control mechanism 454 takes the approach allowable posture. ), And a plurality of types of jackpots are set in accordance with the type of game state, such as a game state that shifts after the special game state (whether or not to shift to the probable game state). A symbol is set. If the big hit is not won in the first special symbol lottery, a lost symbol different from the big hit symbol is set as a stop symbol.

  After the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is determined based on the current game state, the lottery result, the value of the stop pattern random number, the value of the various variation pattern random numbers, and the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved. The change display time of the symbol is determined, and the change pattern of the decoration symbol is selected. After that, the variable display of the first special symbol on the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol and the variable display of the decorative symbol (fluctuation effect) on the decorative symbol display device 479 are started. The variable display according to the fixed pattern is continued over the display time, and in the decorative design, the variable display according to the variable pattern is continued over the variable display time. Thereafter, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is definitely displayed, and a symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is definitely displayed as a decorative symbol. The fixed display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined time.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the first special symbol is determined and displayed. In the special game state, the right entry restriction mechanism 453 of the right special winning device 433 and the central entry restriction mechanism 454 of the central special winning device 434 assume the entry allowable posture a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of the big hit. . For example, when a predetermined number (for example, eight) of game balls are detected by the special winning switches 443 and 444 during the respective permissible attitudes of the central approach control mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum permissible time ( For example, when 29.5 seconds have elapsed, one round ends, and the central entry control mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition position. Thereafter, after a lapse of a predetermined entry prohibition time, the central entry control mechanism 454 returns to the entry permission posture again.

  Only one of the right entry control mechanism 453 and the central entry control mechanism 454 is configured to take an entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined standby time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) One) shifts to the first approach allowable posture in ()). In addition, the special game state ends when a predetermined entry prohibition time elapses after returning to the final entry prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time elapses thereafter (after the ending period). After the end of the special game state, as described above, the game shifts to the time-saving game state or the probable change game state.

  In various game states, if a game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432 or the upper middle starting winning device 632 according to the second special symbol is detected by the second starting winning switch 442 or the second starting winning switch 642, 2 Special symbols will be awarded for starting. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control of the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times at the time of the start winning of the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is obtained, and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. In addition, the determination of the stop symbol corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, the selection of the variation pattern of the decoration symbol, the execution of the variation display, and the transition control of the game state are executed in the same manner as the control relating to the first special symbol. Is done.

  In various game states, when a game ball that has entered the starting device 436 is detected by the start switch 446, a winning random number related to a normal symbol is obtained unless the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol is not being performed, the unit game relating to the acquired ordinary symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol is being performed, the unit game relating to the acquired ordinary symbol is started after the completion of the unit game based on the acquired unit game right relating to the ordinary symbol.

  In a unit game related to a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not a winning has been made based on the value of a winning random number. When the winning is made, a predetermined winning symbol is set as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when no winning is made in the ordinary symbol lottery, a predetermined lost symbol is set as a stopped symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started on the normal symbol display device 473, and in the non-hour reduction state, the fluctuation display in a fixed pattern is continued for a predetermined fluctuation display time, and in the time reduction state. The variable display in a fixed pattern is continued for a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time saving state. With a lapse of a predetermined time according to the gaming state, a stop symbol related to a normal symbol is fixedly displayed over a certain period of time.

  When the stop symbol related to the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the right entry restricting mechanism 452 of the right starting winning device 432 shifts to the entry allowable attitude at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, in a case of winning in the non-time-saving state (the normal game state and the special game state), the right start winning device 432 permits the entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, about 0.1 second). When the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time saving state, the predetermined maximum allowable time (for example, about 2.4 seconds) is longer in the case of winning in the time saving state (the time saving game state and the probable change game state). ), The state is changed to the approach allowable posture intermittently (for example, divided into two times). However, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls is detected by the second start winning switch 442, the right approach restriction mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibited attitude without waiting for the maximum allowable time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of transitions to the entry allowable posture has not reached the predetermined number, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game relating to the current ordinary symbol is ended.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to receive the second special symbol lottery related to the right starting winning device 432, first, it is necessary to win in the ordinary symbol lottery, and further, the game ball is placed in the entry permitted state of the right starting winning device 432 based on the winning. The player must enter the right starting winning device 432. The winning probability for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the time-saving gaming state, but the staying time in the entry-permitted state of the right starting winning device 432 based on the winning in the normal gaming state (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely shorter than the staying time (for example, approximately 2.4 seconds) in the time saving state, so that the second special symbol lottery related to the right starting winning device 432 is performed in the normal gaming state. The opportunity per unit time that can be received is significantly smaller than the opportunity per unit time that can receive the first special symbol lottery. Conversely, in the time-saving gaming state, the opportunity per unit time to receive the second special symbol lottery is significantly greater than the opportunity per unit time to receive the first special symbol lottery.

  Therefore, the player wins the big hit in the first special symbol lottery, and in the subsequent special game state, plays a game aiming at the transition to the certain change game state by causing the game ball to enter the specific passage. On the other hand, in the time-saving game state and the probable change game state, the game is performed with the aim of winning a big hit in the second special symbol lottery according to the right starting winning device 432 before each game state is completed.

  Specifically, in the game board 400, a central structure 420 is provided at the center of the game area in which the game ball flows down, and the game ball is mainly placed on the right side of the central structure 420 within a range where the game ball does not flow down. A game technique of flowing down (left-handed game technique) and a game technique of flowing down a game ball mainly via the right side of the central structure 420 (right-handed game technique) can be selectively performed. In the normal gaming state, the player plays a game by a left-handed gaming technique, and in the time-saving gaming state, plays a game by a right-handed gaming technique. In addition, the right large winning device 433 and the central large winning device 434 are arranged at positions where game balls flowing down the right side with respect to the central structure 420 can enter, and play a right-handed gaming method even in a special gaming state. .

  In addition, the game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 according to the second special symbol located above the central structure 420 in a situation where the game ball is flowing down by the left-handed game technique. . The upper middle start winning device 632 is set so that game balls enter with a very low probability (for example, a probability of approximately 1/60) as compared with the lower middle start winning device 431. The second special symbol lottery received by the entry of the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632 is easier to obtain a value (game value) for the player to play a game than the first special symbol lottery, and a big hit In the case of winning, the probability of shifting to the time saving game state is high, and the number of award balls that can be acquired in the special game state is large. For this reason, during the period of performing the game by the left-handed game technique in the normal gaming state, not only the expectation of the big hit by the first special symbol lottery to the lower middle start winning device 431 but also the upper middle start winning device which rarely occurs. By executing the second special symbol lottery by the entry of the game ball to the game ball 632, it is possible to always expect a chance to acquire a large amount of game value.

  Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching another member or device to the base 501. The base 501 and the intermediate block 103 are connected by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, so that the rear block 104 is supported on the intermediate block 103 so as to be openable and closable.

  The rear block 104 is a game ball tank 510 as a ball storage unit for storing the game balls, and rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) continuously on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and aligns them in one stage. A tank rail 520 as a ball aligning portion, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and payout of game balls on a downstream side of the case rail 530 A payout device 540 for renting out game balls, and guidance as a ball guiding portion for guiding game balls flowing out of the payout device 540 on the downstream side of the payout device 540 to a guidance passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 that controls payout of game balls by the payout device 540 and lending of game balls, and an external power source. A function as a power supply means for converting the power into a predetermined voltage required by the kind of device or the like and outputting the same, and controlling the ejection of game balls based on a firing operation on the firing operation device 250 in cooperation with the main control board 920. A power supply / launch control device 570 having a function as a launch control means, a payout control device 560, a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1), and a card unit (not shown) arranged beside the pachinko machine 100 And a relay device 950 that relays a signal between the two.

  The base 501 is integrally formed of a resin (for example, an ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to a front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 located behind the base portion 502. The base portion 502 has an upper portion formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and a lower portion formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as an attached part to be attached.

  The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. The protective cover portion 503 does not cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the rear surface of the intermediate block 103 that needs to be frequently inspected or confirmed, such as a part of the main control device 370. The size is set so as to form a window for exposing to the window. A large number of ventilation holes 503A having a function of improving the heat dissipation of the heat generated by the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed on the back surface of the protective cover 503.

  The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container opened upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island equipment are sequentially supplied to one end in the longitudinal direction. An opening (not shown) is formed in one end of the game ball tank 510 in the longitudinal direction different from the side on which the game balls are supplied. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. In addition, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is also inclined in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction (front-back direction) as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . In addition, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap therewith, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

  The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 has a passage forming member 521 that forms a substantially gutter-shaped game ball passage having a width through which the game balls pass in a line, and a height gradually increasing as an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. And a rectifying member 522 for rectifying a game ball flowing down the passage having a top surface portion whose height is lowered from a vertically overlapped height to a one-stage height. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

  The case rail 530 is formed vertically long so as to be continuous below the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows into the case rail 530. On the case rail 530, the game ball is curved left and right so as not to flow vigorously and continues downward. A stored ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10) for detecting a broken ball is attached to a middle portion of the ball passage in the case rail 530. The stored ball switch 591 detects an out-of-ball state in which game balls are not normally replenished in the case rail 530 due to clogging of the ball on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof.

  The payout device 540 includes a delivery mechanism for sending out game balls, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as driving means for driving the delivery mechanism, and a payout count switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In response to the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are discharged to the downstream side. Passing of the released game balls through the ball path is detected by the payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of paid out game balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / fire control device 570 are mounted so as to overlap the lower rear surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be located at the lower rear side of the rear block 104. Have been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / firing control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board due to a model change or the like.

  The dispensing control device 560 includes a dispensing control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that accommodates the dispensing control board 930. It is housed inside a substrate case sealed so as not to be opened.

  The power / emission control device 570 includes a power / emission control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power / emission control board 900. The power / emission control board 900 is similar to the main control board 920. Is housed inside a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / emission control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

  The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each unit of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launch device in response to operation of the launch operation device 250. A launch control unit 902 that controls the driving of the 330 and a signal relay unit 903 that relays an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249 are provided.

  The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various powers from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is power of a driving voltage (for example, 12 VDC) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, and drives various switches and executes control processing. For example, power of a control voltage (for example, 5 volts DC), power of a backup voltage for retaining the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

  The power supply unit 901 supplies various types of power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, the power of the internal power, the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the power supply monitoring board 910. The power of the driving voltage, the control voltage, and the backup voltage is supplied to the main control board 920, and these powers are supplied via the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. To the payout control board 930, power of a driving voltage and a control voltage is supplied. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with power of the driving voltage and the control voltage. The emission control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903 are supplied with electric power of a driving voltage and a control voltage.

  A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901, and when the power switch 909 is in an off state, taking in of external power is stopped. The pachinko machine is turned off by turning off the power switch 909, or by removing a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 from the external power supply outlet (not shown) via the power switch 909. A state in which the supply of power to the inside of the device 100 is stopped or a state in which the supply of external power itself is stopped is collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

  The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the power of the control voltage for a predetermined period even after shifting to the power failure state. Accordingly, the main control board 920 can save the state so as to return to the current control state and end the control.

  The launch control unit 902 controls the driving of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the launch solenoid 334 of the launch device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The operation of the ball feeding solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 is permitted when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the fact that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) is detected based on the contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and the firing stop switch 255 for stopping the firing is provided. The firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in an ON state to the main control board 920 on condition that the operation is not performed. The main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 operates the ball feeding solenoid 332 based on the ball feeding control signal in the ON state, and operates the firing solenoid 334 based on the reception of the firing solenoid control signal in the ON state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let it. As a result, game balls are sequentially fired from the firing device 330 with an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the amount of rotation of the firing handle 252).

  The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. The main control board 920 initializes the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 in response to receiving the ON-state initialization signal. Note that the initialization switch 907 does not necessarily need to be configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 may be directly mounted on the main control board 920. The configuration may be such that the initialization switch 907 is accommodated in the board case 371, so that an illegal signal input aimed at a section where a signal is transmitted can be suppressed.

  In addition, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an ON ball overflow signal to the main control board 920 when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the low-speed payout signal outputs the rotation speed (payout) of the payout motor 542. The payout speed of the game balls from the device 540 is reduced. In addition, the main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 receiving the high-speed payout signal controls the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Speed up.

  The power supply monitoring board 910 monitors a power supply state from the power supply / emission control board 900, and supplies power and transmits various signals between the power supply / emission control board 900 and the main control board 920. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power supply monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 901. If the state in which the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that a power failure has occurred, and an on-state power failure signal is output to main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the shift to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the ON state.

  The main control board 920 controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100 as a whole. On the main control board 920, an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily stored when executing the control programs. And the like (not shown) for storing the same. Various other circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. I have. The RAM of the main control board 920 has a configuration in which internal data can be maintained (backed up) by power supply of a backup voltage from the power supply / emission control board 900 even after shifting to a power failure state.

  The payout control board 930 controls the operation of paying out game balls by the payout device 540 in accordance with an instruction from the main control board 920 and the operation of renting out game balls by the payout device 540 in accordance with the operation of the game ball lending device 290. Like the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 includes an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), a ROM (not shown), and a RAM (not shown), and a timer circuit. (Not shown), various circuits such as a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), and a signal transmitting / receiving circuit (not shown) are mounted. The payout control board 930 is provided with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting information communication with another device, and for example, bidirectional information input / output communication with the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 is possible. Are connected to the open / close detection switches 108 and 109, the stored ball switch 591 and the payout counting switch 592 so that only one-way information input communication is possible, and the payout motor 542 is connected to only one-way information. Only output communication is connected. Note that the RAM of the payout control board 930 may have a backup function to maintain internal data for a certain period in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920 Unlike this, a configuration in which the internal data is not maintained in the power failure state may be adopted.

  The sub control board 940 controls the operation of various effect devices, various light emitting devices, various audio devices, and the like based on instructions from the main control substrate 920. The sub-control board 940 is provided with an input / output port as a connecting means for connecting information communication with another device. For example, the sub-control board 940 is connected to the main control board 920 so that only one-way information input communication is possible. , And the input operation device 260 are connected so that information can be communicated in both directions, and the decorative symbol display device 479 and the like are connected so that only one-way information output communication is possible.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 is roughly divided into a main processing started upon recovery from a power failure state and a main processing that is interrupted periodically (in the present embodiment at a period of 2 ms (milliseconds)). Timer interrupt processing.

  First, a main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing main processing of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main processing” in FIG. 11).

  In the main processing of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processing (program start processing S1001 to random number initialization processing S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information is executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition process S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) and the big hit symbol random number initial value counter (part of the RAM) for the special symbol, and the normal symbol The random number initial value updating process S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (part of the area of the RAM), and first to fourth variation type counters for determining a variation time, a variation pattern, and the like. Variation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the counter (partial area of the RAM), and interruption permission processing S for permitting an interrupt 023 and is repeatedly executed. If a timer interrupt request occurs before the interrupt permitting process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permitting process S1023.

  In a series of control start processing, a program start processing S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (a partial area of the RAM) for controlling execution of a program, an interrupt mode setting processing S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and a payout control board A start-up standby process S1003 for waiting for a predetermined time until the 930 and the sub-control board 940 and the like start up is executed.

  After the start-up standby process S1003, a process S1004 for determining the output state of the initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 of the power / emission control board 900, a process S1005 for determining the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM), and saving An information storage state determination process S1007 is performed, and it is determined whether or not the stored information in the RAM is to be deleted based on the determination results. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a partial area of the RAM that has been updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure, and The value of a counter related to the unit game in the middle, the value of the counter stored by the start winning, and the like are exemplified.

  The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation processing S1006), and the current checksum value and the power failure monitoring processing S1202 (see FIG. 12) with the transition to the previous power failure state. ), It is determined whether or not the exclusive OR of the checksum value calculated in (2) with the RAM determination value, which is a 2's complement, is “0” (determination processing S1007). It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

  When the initialization signal is in the ON state (S1004: Y), when the power outage information is not the predetermined power outage value indicating that the storage information has been saved and ended at the time of transition to the power outage state (S1005: N), or stored. If the information is not normally stored (S1007: N), a RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the information stored in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear processing S1008 is executed, the hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 A ware initialization process S1009 is executed.

  After the hardware initialization process S1009, a process S1010 for determining whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is performed. When the power failure information is the power failure value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initializing various information including the recovery of the held information, and a return command indicating the completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By the return of the held information in the RAM return setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 returns to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

  On the other hand, when the power failure information is not the power failure value (S1010: Y), various information is initialized without restoring the held information (RAM initialization processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. Is performed (initialization command output processing S1014).

  In the RAM return setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as an improper detection error immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state. Even if the error has occurred, all of those error states are released. Also, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command. A predetermined initialization process is also performed in each of.

  After the initialization of the RAM according to the situation at the time of start-up (determination processing S1004 to initialization command output processing S1014), if the condition device was activated at the time of the previous transition to the power failure state, the special game state is set. Preparations for returning are performed (special game state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation processing S1015, the operation states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and the processing corresponding to the game state at the time of the power outage state is executed on the sub control board 940. You.

  After the special game state return preparation processing S1015, it is determined whether or not the time reduction state flag is set to determine whether the state is the time reduction state or the non-time reduction state (determination processing S1016). In this case (S1016: Y), a time saving command is output (time saving command output processing S1017). On the other hand, if it is in the non-time saving state (S1016: N), a non-time saving command is output (non-time saving command output processing S1018). Thereafter, the value of the winning random number counter (part of the RAM) relating to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting processing S1019).

  Next, a timer interrupt process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process (abbreviated as “main control interrupt process” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

  In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than the timer interrupt are prohibited. Thereafter, a power outage monitoring process S1202 to an external information output process S1221 relating to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on the detection of various kinds of injustices (S1207: Y), the control signal output processing S1208 to the external information output processing S1221 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1222 for permitting the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. Hereinafter, various main processes will be described individually.

  In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the ON state is detected all three times, it is determined that the power failure state is present. If it is not determined in this determination that a power failure has occurred, the power failure information is maintained at the energized value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the power outage monitoring process S1202 that the power is out, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM return setting processing S1011 or the RAM initialization processing S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. In addition, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and a two's complement of the checksum value is set as a RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop in which substantial control such as progress of the game and monitoring of various sensors is not performed, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. You. Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice after the reception of the power failure signal is detected for the first time.

  In the random number updating process S1203, the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. When the value of the winning random number counter according to the above is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). However, if the value after the change is the same value as the cyclic initial value for the winning random number counter for the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter for the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol. , And the cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

  The big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter for the ordinary symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter for the special symbol. However, as the update range defined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a value unique to each counter is set, and a plurality of counters are configured to be updated asynchronously. Refers to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter for the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol have the same value range, the jackpot symbol random number counter and the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter related to the ordinary symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol have the same value range.

  In the random number initial value update processing S1204, the winning random number initial value counter for the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter for the ordinary symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the special value is changed. If the value of the winning random number initial value counter for the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). Regarding the symbol random number initial value counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the ordinary symbol, the random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is the same except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as the value counter.

  In the variation counter updating process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation time, the variation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “187”), the value is changed to a value larger by “1” than the current value, and the first variation If the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value ("0"). The second to fourth variation type counters are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. Is done.

  In addition, each winning random number counter, big hit symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter, and each variation type counter related to the special symbol and the ordinary symbol need not necessarily have the above configuration, and at least a part of the counter is used as another configuration. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a fixed initial value is updated without using an initial value counter, or a configuration in which a random number generation IC is used without using a program and a value is referred to as necessary. .

  In the game stop determination processing S1206, when the fraud detection information is the fraud detection value, the information is updated to the game stop value, and various information for stopping the game progress is set. On the other hand, when the fraud detection information is not the fraud detection value or is already the game stop value, the game stop determination processing S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when various frauds are detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. In the determination process S1207, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped based on whether or not the fraud detection information is the game stop value.

  In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 for the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 for the second special symbol, and the normal symbol display device 472 A signal for controlling various notification devices such as the symbol display device 473 is output. Further, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right approaching solenoid 462, a right approaching solenoid 463, a center approaching solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are provided. A control signal is output.

  In the switch reading process S1209, the first start winning switch 441, the second start winning switch 442, 642, the right big winning switch 443, the center big winning switch 444, the combination operating switch 445, the start switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447. The signal state from each of the specific passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A, 449B, 649 is read, and a change in the detection state of the game ball by various switches is detected.

  Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, the signal states from the various switches are read twice into the input buffer (part of the RAM) at predetermined time intervals, and the signals from the various switches are read. Each time, a signal state read first (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and a signal state read second (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) Based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”), a change in the detection state of various switches is detected. Then, when the previous detection state is the OFF state, the first signal state is the ON state, and when the second signal state is the ON state, it is determined that each switch has transitioned to the ON state. Then, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. Note that, as described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when it is started, the detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

  In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of the RAM) used for displaying special symbols and ordinary symbols in a variable manner, controlling each game state, and monitoring for irregularities are updated.

  In the fraud detection processing S1211, a fraudulent act of forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices is detected. More specifically, the right start winning device 432, the right big winning device 433, and the central large winning device 434 are forcibly moved to a permissible approaching posture, and a game ball is guided to a specific passage of the right big winning device 433 by vibrating. Induction of forced malfunction of the right starting winning device 432, the right big winning device 433, and the central large winning device 434 by radio waves, guiding game balls to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, lower middle starting winning device 431 , The right starting winning device 432, the upper middle starting winning device 632, the right large winning device 433, and the central large winning device 434 in a situation where there is a high possibility that an illegal act such as guiding a game ball at abnormal timing has been performed. Detect the occurrence.

  In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on detection of a game ball by various switches provided on the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the first start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of a game ball by the first start winning switch 441 (see FIG. 10), a medium start winning counter (a predetermined RAM in the RAM) is set. The area) and the first payout counter (a predetermined area in the RAM) are updated. If the second start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the second start winning switch 442, 642 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Also, when the right big win switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right big win switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the central big win switch 444 (see FIG. 10). If the central special winning switch detection flag is set based on this, the special winning counter (predetermined area of RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of RAM) are updated.

  In the launch control process S1213, the launch-related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feeding solenoid 332 that drives the ball feeding mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

  In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is set to the intermediate block. It is detected whether 103 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is closed. Also, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is compared with the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is closed or not.

  In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands according to the payout control state are set as necessary. Note that the sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281, the upper right acoustic device 282, and the like to execute notification according to the type of the payout state command.

  In the payout signal output processing S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter, as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. Note that the first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated in accordance with the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by one each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and decremented by one each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. Each time the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number (for example, three) of game balls corresponding to the winning (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed), the main control board 920 receives a prize. In a situation where a ball command is requested and payout of prize balls continues, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a winning (for example, 13) having a different number of prize balls from the first payout counter, and outputs a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter to the payout control board. When 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the award ball command.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, the control of holding the right of the unit game relating to the first special symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 relating to the first special symbol is executed, and when a big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery, the right special winning device is provided. The operation control of the 433 and the central winning award device 434 is further executed.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, the control of holding the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, in the holding control of the unit game right related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol holding display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 relating to the second special symbol is executed, and when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the right special winning device The operation control of the 433 and the central winning award device 434 is further executed.

  In the normal symbol-related process S1218, the control of holding the right of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol and the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol are executed. Specifically, in the hold control of the unit game right related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed. In addition, in the control of the unit game relating to the ordinary symbol, the operation control of the ordinary symbol display device 473 relating to the ordinary symbol is executed, and when the ordinary symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right starting winning device 432 is further executed. .

  In the display control process S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related process S1217, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol reservation display device 477 and the like relating to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating those devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in a control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Change of the moving direction of the game ball made by the central structure 420>
Next, a configuration in which the moving direction of the game ball flowing down the game area is changed by the central structure 420 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the central structure 420. FIG. More specifically, FIG. 13 shows a part of the central structure 420 (a top plate decoration 611, an upper left front decoration) mounted on the upper front side which is the side facing the player (ie, the front side). FIG. 612 is a perspective view of the upper right front decoration 613) disassembled with respect to other members.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the top board decoration 611 includes a roof 611B protruding from a position inside the upper end on the back surface of the decoration main body 611A visually recognized by a player. The roof 611B is configured to have an upwardly convex, smoothly curved shape with the apex at the approximate center of the top panel decoration 611. The edge of the roof 611B opposite to the joint with the decoration main body 611A is in contact with the front surface of the central structure 420 on the main body side, whereby the roof 611B is connected to the rear surface of the decoration main body 611A and the central structure 420. Along with the main body-side front surface, the upper side is configured as a spherical passage that is open.

  Therefore, a part of the game ball which is fired from the firing device 330 and enters the upper game area (hereinafter, also referred to as “upper game area”) with respect to the central structure 420, flows down the upper game area, and then the roof 611 </ b> B. Can be reached. As described above, since the roof 611B is configured to have a curved shape that is upwardly convex, the game ball that has reached the roof 611B may have a different shape depending on conditions such as its arrival position and the direction of movement of the game ball at the time of arrival. Roll on 611B in the left direction (arrow Q1 direction) or right direction (arrow Q2 direction).

  In addition, a recess 611C that guides the game ball toward the main body of the central structure 420 is provided substantially at the center (that is, substantially at the top) of the roof 611B. A passage 621 is provided at the end of the recess 611C. Thereby, the game ball that has reached the roof 611B can be guided to the passage port 621 via the concave portion 611C, in addition to being rolled left or right to be discharged from the left end or the right end of the roof 611B. That is, the roof 611B functions as a distribution unit (first distribution unit) that distributes the game balls that have reached the roof 611B to the left, right, or inside the passage 621.

  In the upper right portion on the main body side of the central structure 420, a partition portion 624 is provided for partitioning a game area flowing down by a left-handed game technique and a game area flowing down by a right-handed game technique. The partition part 624 is formed in a plate shape having an inclined surface inclined downward and to the right with a certain gap below the outer rail 402 (see FIG. 7) forming the outer shape of the game area with a certain gap through which the game ball can pass. The formed game ball that passes through the upper side of the partition 624 becomes a game ball that flows down by the right-handed game technique. On the other hand, a game ball passing under the partition 624 becomes a game ball flowing down by the left-handed game technique.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game ball flowing down by the left-handed game technique is only a game area (hereinafter, also referred to as a “left game area”) that is continuous from the left to the lower side with respect to the central structure 420. Instead, it passes through a central upper game area located between the left game area and the upper game area. The upper central game area is an area including the inner area of the central structure 420. In the upper part of the central structure 420, it corresponds to an area in which a game ball flows down the left and right sides of the roof 611B. Including. For this reason, the upper middle start winning device 632 is arranged upstream with respect to the left game area. On the other hand, the lower middle start winning device 431 is provided in a part of the left game area, and is arranged downstream with respect to the upper central game area.

  The movement paths of the game balls distributed to the left and right by the roof 611B will be described later with reference to FIGS. On the other hand, the game ball guided to the passage 621 is guided to the distribution device 622 connected to the passage 621. The distribution device 622 is a device that functions as a second distribution unit, and distributes the guided game balls to the upper middle starting winning device 632 or the outside of the starting winning device 632.

  Below the distribution device 622, a flow-down regulating portion 623 is provided. The flow-down regulating portion 623 is configured as an inclined surface whose upper surface is inclined downward from right to left. Each of the inclined surfaces of the flow-down regulating portion 623 has its respective ends in the longitudinal direction in contact with the back surfaces of the decorations 611, 612, and 613 and the front surface of the central structure 420 on the main body side. As a result, the game balls distributed to the outside of the upper middle starting winning device 632 by the distribution device 622 fall onto the flow-down regulating portion 623, and move on the inclined surface of the flow-down regulating portion 623 by their own weight in the left direction (in the direction of the arrow Q3). ). As a result, the game ball enters the left game area (that is, the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420).

  Here, the distribution device 622 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is an enlarged view of a region E1 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the distribution device 622 mainly includes a left distribution passage 622A, a right distribution passage 622B, and a stage 622C. The left distribution path 622A is a path that guides a game ball that has entered through the passage 621 to the left. On the other hand, the right distribution path 622B is a path that guides a game ball that has entered from the passage 621 to the right.

  The stage 622C is provided on each downstream side of the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B. Thereby, when the game ball passes through the left distribution path 622A, the game ball P enters from the left side of the stage 622C and rolls on the stage 622C as shown in FIG. 13, for example. On the other hand, the game ball that has passed through the right distribution path 622B enters from the right side of the stage 622C and rolls on the stage 622C. Since the contact sensors 662 (see FIG. 10) are provided on the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B, respectively, the game balls enter the stage 622C from the contact sensor 662. Is detected on the basis of the contact sensor signal.

  The stage 622C is provided with a concave portion 622D substantially at the center. A concave portion 622E and a concave portion 622F are provided on the left and right sides of the concave portion 622D, respectively. Each of the recesses 622D, 622E, and 622F is configured so that a game ball can be dropped from the front side (that is, the side that becomes the front of the gaming machine). Thereby, the game ball rolling on the stage 622C falls forward from the stage 622C via any of the concave portions 622D, 622E, and 622F.

  An upper middle starting winning device 632 is provided in front of the stage 622C. The upper middle starting winning device 632 is configured to be reciprocally movable in the left-right direction by a driving device (not shown). Therefore, when the upper middle start winning device 632 that reciprocates is at an appropriate position at the timing when the game ball falls from the stage 622C through any of the concave portions 622D, 622E, and 622F, the upper middle start winning device 632 is placed on the stage. The game ball falling from 622C is received, whereby the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning device 632. As described above, the upper middle start winning device 632 is a start winning device according to the second special symbol, similarly to the right start winning device 432. Therefore, when the game ball which has entered the upper middle start winning device 632 is detected by the second start winning switch 642, the start winning of the second special symbol is achieved.

  On the other hand, when the upper middle starting winning device 632 is not at an appropriate position and the game ball dropped from the stage 622C cannot enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the gaming ball is flowed down as described above. As a result, the game ball rolls leftward (in the direction of arrow Q3) on the inclined surface of the flow-down regulating portion 623 and is discharged to the left game area.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. 16, a description will be given of a movement path of a game ball distributed leftward or rightward (in the direction of arrow Q1 or arrow Q2) by the roof 611B. FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the top plate decoration 611, the upper left front decoration 612, and the upper right front decoration 613 viewed from the back side. FIG. 16 is a partial cross-sectional view of the central structure 420 when the decoration main bodies 611A, 612A, and 613A of the decorations 611, 612, and 613 are removed. The decoration main bodies 611A, 612A, and 613A are parts of the top plate decoration 611, the upper left front decoration 612, and the upper right front decoration 613 that function as decoration means visually recognized by a player.

  As shown in FIG. 15, downwardly extending passage walls 612B and 612C are provided upright on the back surface of the decoration main body 612A of the upper left front decoration 612 with a predetermined width therebetween. As a result, a left downflow passage 652 that is continuous in the up-down direction is formed between the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C. That is, the left downflow passage 652 functions as a warp path formed inside the central structure 420. Therefore, a game ball rolling on the roof 611B in the direction of the arrow Q1 (that is, a game ball distributed to the left side by the roof 611B) is guided by the downflow passage 652, which is a warp route, and flows down the left downflow passage 652.

  As shown in FIG. 16, a downflow regulating section 623 is provided downstream of the left downflow passage 652. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left flow-down passage 652 falls on the flow-down regulating portion 623. Thus, the game ball rolls leftward (in the direction of the arrow Q3) on the inclined surface of the flow-down regulating portion 623. That is, the game balls distributed to the left side by the roof 611B flow down the left flow-down passage 652, then roll on the inclined surface of the flow-down regulating portion 623 to the left, and are discharged to the left game area.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, on the back surface of the decoration main body 613A of the upper right front decoration 613, passage walls 613B and 613C extending downward are erected at a predetermined width. Thereby, a right-downflow passage 653 that is continuous in the up-down direction is formed between the passage wall 613B and the passage wall 613C. That is, the right downflow passage 653 also functions as a warp path formed inside the central structure 420. Therefore, a game ball rolling on the roof 611B in the direction of the arrow Q2 (that is, a game ball distributed to the right by the roof 611B) is guided to the right downflow passage 653 which is a warp route, and flows down the right downflow passage 653. .

  Then, the game ball flowing down the right flow-down passage 653 falls on the flow-down regulating portion 623, and rolls leftward (in the direction of the arrow Q3) on the inclined surface. That is, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B flow down the right downflow passage 653, then roll leftward on the inclined surface of the downflow regulation portion 623, and are discharged to the left game area.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, even the game balls distributed to the right by the roof 611B enter the left game area by passing through the right downflow passage 653 and the downflow restriction portion 623. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, in the pachinko machine 100, between the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C, a plate-shaped projection 612D projecting from the back surface of the decoration main body 612A is provided with the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C. Are provided substantially parallel to the wall surface.

  The protrusion 612D has a bottom surface (a surface in contact with the back surface of the decoration main body 612A) formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending in a continuous direction (that is, a vertical direction) of the left downflow passage 652 and is adjacent to a longitudinal side of the bottom surface. The side surfaces (that is, the surfaces that are substantially parallel to the wall surfaces of the passage wall 612B and the passage wall 612C) are formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width decreases as the distance from the back surface of the decoration main body 612A increases. In other words, the protrusion 612D is configured to have a shape in which the height from the bottom surface, which is the installation surface with respect to the decoration main body 612A, gradually increases inward from the longitudinal end of the bottom surface. The plurality of protrusions 612 </ b> D (five in the example illustrated in FIG. 15) are arranged side by side in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of the left downflow passage 652.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the left downflow passage 652, a concave portion 652 </ b> A corresponding to the shape of the protrusion 612 </ b> D is formed on a surface facing the protrusion 612 </ b> D. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left flow-down passage 652 is not vertically dropped, but rather a path formed by the protrusion 612D and the recess 652A, that is, once toward the back side (the bottom side of the recess 652A) and then toward the front side. Go through the returned path.

  As shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of protrusions 613D similar to the protrusions 612D are provided between the passage walls 613B and 613C also on the back surface of the decoration main body 613A of the upper right front decoration 613. As shown in FIG. 16, a concave portion 653A corresponding to the shape of the protrusion 613D is formed on a surface of the right-flow passage 653 facing the protrusion 613D. Therefore, also with respect to the right downflow passage 653, similarly to the left downflow passage 652, the game ball is formed by the projection 613 </ b> D and the recess 653 </ b> A, and once goes to the back side (the bottom side of the recess 653 </ b> A) and then to the front side Go through the returned path.

  As shown in FIG. 15, on the back surface of the decoration main body 612 </ b> A, a protruding portion 612 </ b> E is formed on the downstream side of the left downflow passage 652, which extends in a direction intersecting with the continuous direction of the left downflow passage 652. . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, on the main body-side front surface of the central structure 420, at a position downstream of the protrusion 612E, a direction similar to the protrusion 612E, which intersects the continuation direction of the left downflow passage 652. A protruding portion 652B is formed to be elongated. Thus, the game ball flows down the left downflow passage 652 while colliding with the projections 612E and 652B. Since the mechanical energy of the game ball decreases due to the collision with the protrusions 612E and 652B, the collision between the game ball and the flow-down regulating portion 623 can be eased.

  The curved shape of the roof 611B is configured substantially symmetrically for the purpose of smoothing the distribution of the game balls to the left and right. On the other hand, the inclined surface of the flow-down regulating portion 623 is configured to be inclined downward from right to left. Therefore, inevitably, the distance from the left end of the roof 611B to the game ball flowing down the left downflow passage 652 to reach the downflow regulation portion 623 is the distance from the right end of the roof 611B to the right downflow passage 653. It is longer than the distance to reach the flow-down regulating portion 623. Therefore, the difference in energy when the game ball is dropped (collides) with the flow-down regulating portion 623 between the case where the game ball is discharged from the left end of the roof 611B and the case where the game ball is discharged from the right end of the roof 611B. Therefore, there is a possibility that the behavior of the game ball dropped on the flow-down regulating portion 623 becomes uneven due to the occurrence.

  On the other hand, as described above, the protrusions 612E and 652B that are not downstream of the right-downflow passage 653 are provided downstream of the left-downflow passage 652, which has a longer flowing distance of the game ball than the right-downflow passage 653. Therefore, even when the game balls are distributed to either the left or right of the roof 611B, the behavior of the game balls dropped on the flow-down regulating portion 623 can be smoothed.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the central structure 420, a stage 625 is provided below an opening 420A provided near the center thereof. A game ball that has passed through a left warp passage 628 (see FIG. 17) formed inside the left side of the central structure 420 enters the stage 625. Since a contact sensor 665 (see FIG. 10) is provided on the left warp passage 628, entry of a game ball to the stage 625 is detected based on a contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 665. You.

  The stage 625 is provided with three concave portions 625A, 625B, and 625C, and a game ball that has entered the stage 625 is distributed to any of these concave portions 625A to 625C. When the gaming ball is distributed to the leftmost concave portion 625B or the rightmost concave portion 625C among the three concave portions 625A to 625C, the gaming ball falls from the front of the stage 625 (the front side of the gaming machine).

  On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the central concave portion 625A enter the entrance 626 formed in the stage back cover 615 erected at the end of the rear side of the stage 625 (the back side of the gaming machine). The game ball that has entered the entrance 626 passes through a passage (not shown) communicating with the entrance 626 formed inside the central structure 420, and from a discharge port 627 formed below the stage 625. Is discharged. The function of the stage 625 will be described later.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 relating to the change in the moving direction of the game ball performed by the central structure 420 will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B can enter the left side game area by passing through the right downflow passage 653 and the downflow regulation portion 623.

  In a typical game machine of the related art, the game balls distributed to the right side by the distribution unit provided at the upper part of the central structure flow down the right side as it is, and the game balls distributed to the left side flow down the left side as it is. The behavior of the game balls distributed by the distribution unit also affected the position of the game balls flowing downstream. Therefore, in a conventional gaming machine, when a start winning device such as a lower middle start winning device 431 is provided in a game region on the left side of the central structure (that is, a left game region), The player performs a shooting operation of the game ball so as to directly aim at the left game area (left-handed game technique) or to aim the game ball at the distribution section on the left side. As described above, in the conventional gaming machine, the flow starting position of the game ball aimed at by the player becomes uniform, and a large number of the game balls flow down on one side where a bonus related to the game such as a start winning device is easily given. The firing operation of the player was easily limited and lacked unexpectedness.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100, even if the player fires the game ball aiming at the right side far from the entrance of the game area (that is, the exit of the launch path 401B), the player places the game ball in the left game area. And let it flow down. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the positions aimed by the player by the shooting operation, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. Thereby, the interest of the game can be suitably improved.

  In addition, even if the shooting operation is performed so that a large number of game balls flow down to the right side in the game area, the game ball can be returned to the left game area by the right downflow passage 653 and the downflow regulation unit 623. Even if not only the entry of the game ball into the passage 621 in the central structure 420 from the left side but also the flow of many game balls toward the entry into the passage opening 621 from the right, the game ball can be moved to the left game area. Can be given a privilege related to the game. Also in this respect, the interest of the game can be suitably improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, it is possible to enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 on condition that the game ball has entered the passage 621 in the central structure 420. In other words, the game ball does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632 without entering the passage 621. Therefore, when the game ball is fired so as to aim at the entrance to the passage 621 from the right side, the game ball does not enter the passage 621 and the opportunity to enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 is lost. However, since the game balls are distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, there is a possibility that the game balls can pass to the lower middle starting winning device 431. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the loss of the opportunity to enter the upper middle start winning device 632, and in this respect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the central structure 420 is provided above the lower middle start winning device 431 in a front view of the pachinko machine 100 (see FIG. 7). As a result, the roof 611B of the top plate decoration 611 is positioned so as to vertically overlap the lower middle starting winning device 431. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B pass through the flow-down regulating portion 623. By passing through and moving to the left, the vehicle reaches the lower middle starting winning device 431 through a substantially S-shaped movement path. Therefore, the player moves the game path distributed to the right side by the roof 611B to the lower middle starting prize device 431 because the movement path is different from the path that simply flows down. Can be clearly conscious. Thereby, even if the player fires the game ball aiming at the side distant from the left game area (that is, the right side), there is a possibility that the game ball may pass through the lower middle starting winning device 431. Since the firing operation can be performed while clearly grasping, it is possible to suitably enjoy a game in which the shooting operation is performed aiming at the right side.

  Here, the decorative symbol display device 479 for displaying a decorative symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol starting winning or the second special symbol lottery based on the second special symbol starting winning is provided. In the front view of the pachinko machine 100, the pachinko machine 100 is provided between the roof 611B and the lower middle start winning device 431. That is, the decorative symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery is displayed between the roof 611B and the lower middle starting winning device 431. Thereby, when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the player follows the moving path of the game ball and, when the game ball enters the lower middle starting winning device 431, looks at the line of sight. Is raised upward from the position of the lower middle start winning device 431, so that the decorative symbol according to the result of the lottery based on the game ball having entered the lower middle start winning device 431 (that is, the first special symbol lottery). Can be visually recognized. After checking the state of the decorative symbol display device 479, the player can raise the line of sight again to visually recognize the distribution of the game balls on the roof 611B located above the decorative symbol display device 479. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's line of sight from being distracted.

  In the pachinko machine 100, when a game ball enters the passage 621 of the central structure 420, the game ball is guided to the stage 622C, and the upper middle start winning device 632 or the start winning device is operated by the stage 622C. 632. If the game ball has not entered the upper middle starting winning device 632 even though it has entered the passage 621, the game ball falls onto the flow-down regulating portion 623 and is discharged to the left game area. Thereby, even if the player cannot enter the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632, the player may allow the game ball to enter the lower middle start winning device 431 in the left game area. We can expect that we cannot do it.

  In particular, even when the game ball falls from the concave portion (recess 622D or 622F) on the right side with respect to the position of the upper middle starting winning device 632 that reciprocates in the left-right direction, the game ball is moved to the left game area. Since the player can be guided, the player may be surprised with the moving path of the game ball, and may enter the lower middle start winning device 431 for the game ball moving along the unexpected path. You can expect to have none.

  In a typical game machine of the related art, when a game ball that has entered an entry portion such as the passage 621 does not pass through an advantageous area such as the upper middle start winning device 632, the game ball is converted into a pachinko machine. 100 had been discharged outside. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100, even if the game ball that has entered the passage 621 does not enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100, Again, a chance to enter the lower middle start winning device 431 is given. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the game ball that has entered the passage 621 not entering the upper middle starting winning device 632, and in that respect, it is also possible to improve the interest of the game. .

<Behavior of the game ball according to the falling position to the downflow regulation unit 623>
Next, with reference mainly to FIG. 17, the behavior of the game ball according to the position of falling to the flow-down regulating portion 623 will be described. FIG. 17 is a partial sectional view of FIG. 16 as viewed from the front. Note that FIG. 17 also shows a general winning device 639 arranged in a left game area (that is, a game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420).

  As described above, the game balls distributed to the left side or the right side by the roof 611B flow down the left downflow passage 652 or the right downflow passage 653, and then leftward on the inclined surface of the downflow restriction portion 623 (arrow Q3 direction: FIG. 16) and is discharged to the left game area. Here, as shown in FIG. 17, the flow-down regulating portion 623 is configured such that the longitudinal direction of the inclined surface provided on the upper surface thereof is longer than the width of the roof 611B in the left-right direction. Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the left by the roof 611B (that is, when the game ball flows down the left downflow passage 652), when the game ball is distributed to the right by the roof 611B (that is, when the game ball is left). (When flowing down the downflow passage 652), the falling position of the game ball to the downflow regulation unit 623 is different.

  Specifically, when the game ball is sorted to the left side by the roof 611B, the side near the exit 623A, which is the left end of the flow-down regulating portion 623, is the drop position of the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the side far from the exit 623A (that is, the side near the right end of the flow-down regulating portion 623) is the drop position of the game ball.

  Since the inclined surface of the flow-down regulating portion 623 is configured to incline from right to left, the height (vertical length) with respect to the position of the outlet 623A increases as the distance from the outlet 623A (that is, the left end of the inclined surface) increases. Get higher. Therefore, as the falling position of the game ball to the flow-down regulating unit 623 becomes farther from the position of the exit 623A of the flow-down regulating unit 623, the height of the falling position with respect to the exit 623A is higher.

  That is, the height of the falling position with respect to the exit 623A differs depending on the direction in which the game balls are distributed by the roof 611B. For example, a game ball distributed to the right by the roof 611B falls to a position higher than the exit 623A as compared to a case where the game ball is distributed to the left. Therefore, the mode of acceleration of the game balls discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow-down regulating portion 623 can be made different depending on the direction of distribution of the game balls by the roof 611B.

  Specifically, when the game ball is distributed to the left side by the roof 611B and flows down the left downflow passage 652, the drop point to the downflow control section 623 is closer to the exit 623A, and the height with respect to the exit 623A is relatively high. Low. Therefore, in such a case, the acceleration of the game ball discharged from the exit 623A tends to be relatively small. On the other hand, when the game ball is distributed to the right by the roof 611B and flows down the right downflow passage 653, the drop point to the downflow control portion 623 is farther from the outlet 623A, and the height with respect to the outlet 623A is relatively high. high. Therefore, in such a case, the acceleration of the game ball discharged from the exit 623A tends to be relatively large.

  Therefore, when the game ball is distributed to the left side by the roof 611B, the game ball discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow-down regulating portion 623 easily takes a trajectory J1 flowing down on a side closer to the central structure 420. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the right side by the roof 611B, the game balls discharged from the outlet 623A of the flow-down regulating portion 623 flow down the side farther from the central structure 420 (that is, the side farther than the track J1). It is easy to take the trajectory J2.

  The game ball discharged from the exit 623A of the flow-down regulating portion 623 enters the left game area. Above the left game area, a general winning device 639 is arranged (see FIG. 7). More specifically, the general prize winning device 639 is disposed at a position near the exit 623A of the flow-down regulating portion 623 and slightly to the left of the exit 623A in the left game area.

  By arranging the general prize device 639 at a position slightly to the left with respect to the exit 623A, the possibility that the game ball discharged from the flow-down regulating portion 623 enters the general prize device 639 has passed through the trajectory J2. In this case, it is higher than when passing through the trajectory J1. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball enters the general prize device 639 increases as the point of falling to the flow-down regulating section 623 becomes farther from the exit 623A. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the possibility of entering the general prize device 639 is higher when the gaming balls are sorted to the right by the roof 611B.

  An opening 628A serving as an entrance of the left warp passage 628 is provided on the left side of the central structure 420. The game ball that has entered from the opening 628A passes through the left warp passage 628 formed inside the central structure 420, and enters the stage 625. As described above, the game ball that has entered the stage 625 rolls on the stage 625 and is distributed to any of the concave portions 625A to 625C (see FIG. 16). At this time, when the game ball is distributed to the central concave portion 625A, the game ball enters the entrance 626 and is discharged from the discharge port 627.

  Since the outlet 627 is located directly above the lower middle start winning device 431 (see FIG. 7), the game ball discharged from the outlet 627 enters the lower middle start winning device 431 with high probability. That is, the game ball distributed to the concave portion 625A by the stage 625 easily enters the lower middle starting winning device 431 located immediately below the outlet 620. That is, when the game ball flowing down the left game area enters the opening 628A, there is a possibility that the game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431 with a high probability.

  Since the opening 628A is provided on the left side of the central structure 420, the possibility that the game ball discharged from the flow-down regulating portion 623 enters the opening 628A is different from the case of the above-described general winning device 639. When passing along the track J1 passing on the side closer to the central structure 420, the height is higher than when passing along the track J2. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball enters the opening 628A is higher as the point of falling to the flow-down regulating portion 623 is closer to the exit 623A. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the possibility of entering the opening 628A is higher when the gaming balls are sorted to the left by the roof 611B.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 100, an operation and an effect related to the behavior of the game ball in accordance with the position where the game ball is dropped on the flow-down regulating portion 623 will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the flow-down regulating unit 623 is configured such that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down regulating unit 623 to the left game area is different depending on the position where the game ball is received. For example, the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged to the left game area differs depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the right side or the left side by the roof 611B. On the other hand, the general winning device 639 is provided at a position having a different possibility of passing according to the position of the game ball received by the flow-down regulating unit 623. The opening 628A serving as the entrance of the left warp passage 628 is also provided at a position where the possibility of passage differs according to the position of the game ball received by the flow-down regulating unit 623, similarly to the general winning device 639. Thereby, the possibility that the player can receive the privilege related to the game can be changed according to the position of the game ball received by the flow-down regulating unit 623.

  Generally, the entry of a game ball into an advantageous area such as the general winning device 639 is easily determined by the arrangement of a flow-down changing member such as a nail provided near the advantageous area, and the game ball is placed at a position away from the advantageous area. Behavior is less likely to affect entry into the advantage zone. Therefore, there has been a problem that the player is not interested in only the behavior of the game ball in a part of the game area, but in the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the game ball received by the flow-down regulating unit 623. Can change the possibility that the player can receive the benefits related to the game, depending on the position of the player, so that the player can enjoy the game of moving the game ball in the flow-down regulating section 623, whereby It is possible to suitably improve the interest in the game. In addition, since the possibility that the player can receive the benefits related to the game can be changed in accordance with the direction in which the game balls are distributed by the roof 611B, the interest in the game in which the game balls are distributed by the roof 611B can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the general prize winning device 639 is disposed at a position slightly to the left with respect to the exit 623A of the flow-down regulating portion 623. In other words, the possibility of entering the general prize device 639 is higher when the game balls are distributed to the right side by the roof 611B. Therefore, it is possible to improve interest in firing the game ball at a predetermined position such as a position where the game ball can be distributed to the right side by the roof 611B.

  The game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B and a part of the game balls distributed by the stage 622C both pass through the flow-down regulating portion 623. For this reason, although the game ball distributed to the right side by the roof 611B may pass through the track J2, the game ball distributed by the stage 622C may be blocked by the game ball. Since the timing at which the game balls are discharged from the stage 622C fluctuates and is difficult to predict, even if the player aims at the progress of the game balls along the trajectory J2, the progress of some of the game balls is discharged from the stage 622C. A situation occurs that is blocked by the ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right part of the center upper game area from being extremely advantageous as compared with the left part.

<Functions of protrusions 612D and 613D>
Next, the functions of the protrusions 612D and 613D will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 18 is a front view of the central structure 420. As shown in FIG. 18, an upper left front decoration 612 and an upper right front decoration 613 are provided on the left and right sides of the front upper portion of the central structure 420.

  In the upper left front decoration 612, the decoration main body 612A whose front side is visually recognized by the player is made of a material whose surface is transparent or translucent and capable of transmitting light. On the back side of the decoration main body 612A, a luminous body is provided as a panel surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10), and by causing the luminous body to emit light, light transmitted through the front side of the decoration main body 612A is transmitted to the game board 400. decorate. That is, the upper left front decoration 612 has a function as a decoration means for decorating the game board 400.

  On the other hand, similarly to the decorative main body 612A, the decorative main body 613A of the upper right front decoration 613 is also configured as a hollow body whose surface is made of a transparent or translucent and light transmissive material. Therefore, the upper right front decoration 613 also functions as a decoration means for decorating the game board 400, like the upper left front decoration 612.

  In particular, since the surfaces of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A are both configured such that the side facing the player (that is, the front side) is configured as an undulating surface (decorated undulating surface), each of the upper left front decoration 612 and the upper right front decoration 613 is used. The decoration function is enhanced.

  Each back surface of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A is also made of a transparent or translucent and light-transmissive material, like the front surface. Therefore, when the upper left front decoration 612 and the upper right front decoration 613 are viewed from the front side, the player can visually recognize the back side (that is, the back side on the back side of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A).

  As described above, the flow-down passages 652 and 653 are provided on the back sides of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A (see FIGS. 15 and 16), so that the player can perform the warping path via the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A. It is possible to visually recognize a game ball flowing down the flow passages 652 and 653 provided in the central structure 420. Therefore, the player can grasp the state in which the game ball distributed to either the right side or the left side by the roof 611B moves on the warp route by visually recognizing through the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A.

  However, since each of the front decorations 612 and 613 has a function as a decoration means as described above and emits light as necessary, the light deteriorates the visibility of each back side of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A. This makes it difficult for the player to specify the positions of the downflow passages 652 and 653. Accordingly, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the whereabouts of the game balls distributed by the roof 611B. In particular, since the surfaces of the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A are configured as undulating surfaces, the emitted light is scattered on the undulating surfaces, and the visibility of each back side of the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A is significantly deteriorated.

  On the other hand, the projections 612D, 613D extending in the continuous direction of the flow-down passages 652, 653 are provided in the flow-down passages 652, 653 on the respective back surfaces (more specifically, on the back sides of the respective back surfaces) of the decoration main bodies 612A, 613A. Is provided (see FIG. 15). For this reason, in the decorative main bodies 612A and 613A, light is more difficult to transmit in the portion where the protrusions 612D and 613D are provided than in other portions. The decorative main bodies 612A and 613A emit light by a light emitting body provided on the back surface side thereof, and the thickness of the protrusions 612D and 613D in the front-rear direction is larger than that of other parts, so that light is hardly transmitted. This is because the rear surface of the projections 612D and 613D is inclined in the front-rear direction, so that light from the rear side hardly enters the projections 612D and 613D. Therefore, even when each of the front decorations 612 and 613 emits light, the player can visually recognize the portion where the protrusions 612D and 613D are provided as a darker portion than other portions.

  As described above, since the bottom surfaces of the protrusions 612D and 613D (the surfaces of the decorative main body 612A that are in contact with the back surface of the 613A) are formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending in the continuous direction of the respective flow-down passages 652 and 653. The dark portion is visually recognized as a streak extending in the continuous direction of each of the flow passages 652 and 653. Therefore, the player can specify the positions of the downflow passages 652 and 653 based on the dark portion. Thus, the protrusions 612D and 613D function as passage display means for displaying the flow-down passages 652 and 653.

  In particular, as described above, the surfaces of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A are configured as undulating surfaces, and while enhancing the decoration effect by light, the visibility of each back side of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A is deteriorated. Is provided with projections 612D and 613D functioning as passage display means for displaying the flow-down passages 652 and 653, so that the warp path ( The visibility of the flow-down passages 652, 653) can be favorably secured.

  In addition, since a plurality of protrusions 612D and 613D are provided in a direction intersecting with the continuous direction of each of the flow passages 652 and 653, the player can visually recognize a plurality of streaks as dark portions, and The positions of the passages 652, 653 can be easily specified.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating the shape of the downflow passage. More specifically, FIG. 19 is a diagram in which a portion of the right downflow passage 653 is extracted from the cross-sectional view taken along the line XA-XA of FIG. 18. As shown in FIG. 19, the right-downflow passage 653 is configured as a meandering path by the protrusion 613D and the recess 653A formed on the surface facing the protrusion 613D.

  Thus, the game ball flowing down the right-downflow passage 653 does not flow vertically but flows down a path meandering to the inner side of the central structure 420 (that is, the bottom side of the concave portion 652A). By causing the game ball to meander and flow down, the game ball flows down while colliding with the right downflow passage 653, whereby the flow down speed of the game ball can be reduced. That is, the protrusion 613D has a function as a speed reduction unit. Note that the left downflow passage 652 is also configured as a meandering path similar to that in FIG. Therefore, the protrusion 612D also functions as a deceleration unit similar to the protrusion 613D.

  FIG. 20 is an enlarged view of a region E2 in FIG. The right-downflow passage 653 has a passage width W1 in the left-right direction, that is, a separation distance between the passage wall 613B and the passage wall 613C is a distance that allows two game balls to pass at the same time. By adopting such a width, ball clogging in the right-downflow passage 653 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the right downflow passage 653, the width (length in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of the right downflow passage 653) W2 of each section partitioned by the protrusion 613D is the diameter of the game ball (width of the game ball). A smaller distance is assumed. Thus, the game ball flowing down the right-flow passage 653 is rectified by the adjacent protrusion 613D. That is, the protrusion 613D has a function as a rectifying unit.

  As described above, since the flowing game balls are rectified by the protrusion 613D, even in a situation where two game balls pass through the right-flow passage 653 almost at the same time, it is possible to suppress clogging of the balls by those game balls. it can. The left downflow passage 652 is also configured in the same manner as in FIG. Therefore, the protrusion 612D also functions as a rectifying unit similar to the protrusion 613D.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 having the protrusions 612D and 613D will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, since the projections 612D and 613D functioning as passage display means are provided on the back surfaces of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A, the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A decorate the game board 400 by emitting light. However, the existence of the left and right flow-down passages 652 and 653 can be easily grasped before the start of the game (that is, before the game ball enters the left game area including the lower middle start winning device 431). Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling distrust or irritation with respect to the game ball that has entered the game ball passage, the player can enjoy the game started by causing the game ball to enter the game ball passage. Can be. This makes it possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the left and right downflow passages 652, 653 are passages through which the game balls distributed to the left and right by the roof 611B respectively pass, and a downflow regulation portion 623 is provided downstream of each of the downflow passages 652, 653. Game balls that have passed through the flow-down passages 652 and 653 roll on the flow-down regulating portion 623 and are discharged to the left game area. At this time, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B pass through the right-downflow passage 653, and then roll from the side near the right end of the downflow restriction portion 623 to the exit 623A. Therefore, when the game ball is sorted to the right by the roof 611B, the ball passes through a relatively long route before entering the left game area. In the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the existence of the right-downflow passage 653 can be easily grasped before the start of the game, so that the player feels distrust of the game ball that has entered the relatively long path. Can be suitably suppressed.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the projections 612D and 613D function as speed reduction means in a meandering portion formed together with the recess 652A, while the projections 612D and 613D function as rectification means. Ball clogging can be suppressed.

<Stage 622C, 625>
Next, two stages 622C and 625 provided on the central structure 420 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating the upper and lower stages 622C and 625. More specifically, FIG. 21 is a front view of the game board 400 with a partial configuration omitted.

  In FIG. 21, the shape of the rolling surface of each of the stages 622C and 625 as viewed from the front of the gaming machine is particularly indicated by a thick line. In FIG. 21, the positions of the flow-down regulating portion 623 and the left warp passage 628 are indicated by broken lines, and the above-mentioned trajectories J1 and J2 that the game balls discharged from the flow-down regulating portion 623 can take are also shown.

  The stage 622C is provided above the decorative symbol display device 479 in a game machine front view. In the stage 622C, the rolling surface on which the gaming ball rolls has a wavy streamline shape extending in the left-right direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. Specifically, the rolling surface of the stage 622C mainly includes a concave-convex surface formed of a convex surface that is formed to protrude upward near the center and a concave surface that is formed by denting left and right below the convex surface. You. The uneven surface is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to a substantially center of the convex surface. The left and right ends of the rolling surface of the stage 622C are located above the top of the convex surface. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the stage 622C reciprocates left and right.

  The stage 625 is provided below the decorative symbol display device 479 in a game machine front view. That is, the stage 622C and the stage 625 are arranged vertically above and below the decorative symbol display device 479.

  On the lower stage 625, the rolling surface on which the game ball rolls has a wavy streamline shape extending in the left-right direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, similarly to the stage 622C. Specifically, the rolling surface of the stage 625 mainly includes a concave-convex surface formed by a convex surface that is formed to protrude upward near the center, and a concave surface that is formed by denting left and right below the convex surface. You. The uneven surface is formed substantially symmetrically with respect to a substantially center of the convex surface. The left and right ends of the rolling surface of the stage 625 are located above the top of the convex surface. Thereby, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the stage 625 reciprocates left and right.

  Each of the rolling surfaces of the stages 622C and 625 mainly includes an uneven surface composed of a convex surface and concave surfaces formed on the right and left sides thereof. In addition, the game machine rolls left and right on each rolling surface while moving up and down in a front view of the gaming machine on a smooth trajectory along the convex and concave surfaces. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the upper stage 622C and the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rolling surface of the lower stage 625 are different. Similar to each other.

  A recess 622D (see FIG. 14) is provided at the top of the convex surface of the rolling surface of the upper stage 622C. On the other hand, a concave portion 622E (see FIG. 14) is provided at the bottom of the left concave surface. In addition, a concave portion 622F (see FIG. 14) is provided at the bottom of the right concave surface.

  Each of these recesses 622D, 622E, and 622F has a shape that is inclined downward toward the front (the front side of the gaming machine), so that the game ball that has entered the stage 622C has three recesses 622D, 622E. , 622F, the game ball is guided forward along each of the recesses 622D, 622E, 622F and falls from the front of the stage 622C.

  As described above, the upper middle start winning device 632 provided in front of the stage 622C is configured to be able to reciprocate in the left-right direction. Therefore, a game ball that has fallen from the front of the stage 622C via any of the recesses 622D, 622E, and 622F, has an upper middle start winning device 632 provided that the upper middle start winning device 632 is at an appropriate position at the timing of the fall. Enter 632.

  On the other hand, a concave portion 625A (see FIG. 16) is provided at the top of the convex surface of the rolling surface of the lower stage 625. On the other hand, a concave portion 625B (see FIG. 16) is provided at the bottom of the left concave surface. In addition, a concave portion 625C (see FIG. 16) is provided at the bottom of the right concave surface.

  Of these recesses 625A, 625B, 625C, the left and right recesses 625B, 625C have a shape that is inclined downward toward the front (the front side of the gaming machine), whereby the game ball that has entered the stage 625 is Are distributed to the concave portions 625B and 625C, the game balls are guided forward along the concave portions 625B and 625C, and fall from the front of the stage 625.

  On the other hand, the central concave portion 625A has a shape inclined downward toward the rear side (the back side of the gaming machine), and the game balls distributed to the concave portion 624A are guided rearward, and the gaming machine rear side of the concave portion 624A. Into the entrance 626 that is connected to the end of. The game ball that has entered the entrance 626 is discharged from the discharge port 627 located on the upstream side of the lower middle starting winning device 431.

  The game ball distributed to the concave portion 625A on the stage 625 enters the lower middle starting winning device 431 located on the downstream side of the outlet 620 with a high probability. On the other hand, the other concave portions (that is, the concave portions 625B and 625C) are located at positions deviated in the left-right direction with respect to the lower middle starting winning device 431, so that the game balls distributed to these concave portions 625B and 625C are lower. It is difficult to enter the side starting start winning device 431.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 relating to the shape of the stages 622C and 625 will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, two stages 622C and 625 capable of distributing game balls toward the upper middle starting winning device 632 and the lower middle starting winning device 431 are provided. Thereby, the player can enjoy the playability of the distribution by the stage 622C or the stage 625 for both the upper middle start winning device 632 and the lower middle start winning device 431, respectively, so that the interest of the game is appropriately improved. It becomes possible.

  In particular, since these stages 622C and 625 have rolling surfaces configured to have a similar shape with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball, the rolling behavior of the game ball on the rolling surface is changed to both stages. 622C and 625 are similar. As a result, the player can enjoy the distribution of the game balls by the respective stages 622C and 625 in the same manner.

  Each of the stage 622C and the stage 625 is configured in a wavy streamline shape whose rolling surface extends in the left-right direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. The stage 622C and the stage 625 having such a shape are provided up and down via a decorative symbol display device 479 formed substantially at the center of the game area, so that the game ball can flow down in the horizontal direction of the decorative symbol display device 479. It is possible to secure a game area with a suitable size.

  At this time, since the left warp passage 628 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 479, the game ball flowing down the left game area passes through the left warp channel 628, so that the decorative symbol display device 479 is provided. Is guided to the stage 625 provided below the. Therefore, the game area around the decorative symbol display device 479 can be effectively used.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, even if the game ball does not enter the upper middle start winning device 632 as a result of the distribution by the stage 622C, in that case, the game ball passes through the flow-down regulating unit 623, and the left game is performed. Released into the area. At this time, for example, when a game ball released from the flow-down regulating portion 623 flows down the central structure 420 on the trajectory J1 flowing down on a side closer to the trajectory J2, the game ball is moved to the left warp passage 628. To the stage 625.

  In this way, even if the game ball does not enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 as a result of the sorting by the stage 622C, there is a path for guiding the game ball to the stage 625, so that the player has the lower side. A chance to enter the middle start winning device 431 (a chance to perform the first special symbol lottery) is given again. Therefore, the game ball distributed by the stage 622C does not enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, and it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player that the second special symbol lottery is not performed.

  In addition, when the game balls distributed by the stage 622C are distributed again in the stage 625, the rolling behaviors of the two stages 622C and 625 are similar. At 625, it can be intuitively recognized that the same sort as the sort by the stage 622C is likely to obtain a special symbol lottery. Therefore, also in that respect, it is possible to make the player feel that another chance to perform the special symbol lottery (more specifically, the first special symbol lottery) is obtained.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 100, as described above, the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 have rolling surfaces configured to have similar shapes with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball, while the concave portions 622D and 625A formed in the middle. (See FIG. 16), but the game balls are configured to have different shapes in which the discharging directions are different from each other. As a result, the difference between the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 can be distinguished by the difference in the discharging direction of the game balls discharged from the concave portions 622D and 625A. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the monotonousness of the game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the stage 622C and the stage 625.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the lower middle start winning device 431 is fixedly provided, while the upper middle start winning device 632 is configured to be able to reciprocate in the left-right direction. Therefore, the probability that the game ball distributed by the upper stage 622C enters the upper middle start winning device 632 is smaller than the probability that the game ball distributed by the lower stage 625 enters the lower middle start winning device 431. Lower. Also in this respect, the monotonousness of the game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the stage 622C and the stage 625 can be avoided.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632, a higher value (game) than when a game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431. Value) can be expected. That is, the value expected when a game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632 is different from the expected value when the game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431. Therefore, also in this point, it is possible to avoid the monotonousness of the game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the stage 622C and the stage 625.

<Movable body 710>
Next, the movable body 710 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 400. As shown in FIG. 22, a housing case 701 is provided on the back surface of the base 401. Various devices for display, such as a decorative design display device 479 and a movable body 710 described below, are stored in the storage case 701. The storage case 701 has a collection / discharge passage for collecting game balls discharged from the game area.

  The movable body 710 is disposed closer to the central structure 420 than the decorative symbol display device 479 in the storage case 700. That is, the movable body 710 is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 497 and the central structure 420. The movable body 710 is connected to a movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) including a motor and the like. The movable body driving device 721 operates under the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), whereby the movable body 710 operates in the vertical direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

  The movable body 710 sets a predetermined position below the decorative symbol display device 479 as an initial position in a game machine front view (see FIG. 24). That is, the movable body 710 in the initial position does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 479. Then, when various operation conditions described later are satisfied, the movable body 710 is moved to each position above the initial position. Therefore, when the predetermined operation condition is satisfied, the player visually recognizes the movable body 710 at a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  FIG. 23 is a front view of the movable body 710. In the present embodiment, the movable body 710 has the appearance of a whale character, but various shapes can be adopted as the appearance. The movable body 710 mainly includes a main body 711 and a decorative symbol display device 779 provided on the front side of the gaming machine in the main body 711. The decorative symbol display device 779 is configured as a plurality of circular light-emitting units 779A arranged in the left-right direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

  Each of the light emitting units 779A includes a light emitting body such as an LED, and by individually controlling the light emitting of each light emitting body, the plurality of light emitting units 779A can be individually turned on. Of the plurality of light emitting units 779A, the central light emitting unit 779A is larger than the other light emitting units 779A and is gorgeously decorated. On the surface of the central light emitting portion 779A, a character 779B of "this" indicating that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is a big hit is fixedly formed.

  The decorative symbol display device 779 is a unit game related to the first special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 or the entry of the game ball into the lower middle start winning device 431 under predetermined conditions. Alternatively, it is a device that performs a variable display or a fixed display in a unit game related to a second special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the right starting winning device 432.

  Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 779 sets the plurality of light emitting units 779A in a predetermined lighting pattern (for example, a lighting pattern in which the light emitting units 779A that emit light are moved one by one from left to right, or all the light emitting units 779A are set in a predetermined lighting pattern). (Lighting pattern for lighting in accordance with the rhythm of the rhythm), the fluctuation display is performed.

  Then, when a big hit is won in the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the variable display, the stop display is performed by turning on the light emitting portion 779A at the center, and the fixed display indicating the big hit is performed. Since the characters 779B are formed on the surface of the central light-emitting portion 779A, the player has noticed that the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery was a big hit against the stop display at the central light-emitting portion 779A. recognize. On the other hand, in other cases, the stop display is performed by turning on the light emitting unit 779A other than the center, so that the fixed display indicating that there is no big hit is performed.

  Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the lighting patterns of the plurality of light emitting units 779A differ depending on the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, a lighting pattern for lighting all the light emitting units 779A in accordance with a predetermined rhythm (for example, 3, 3, 7 beats) is compared with a lighting pattern for moving the light emitting units 779A one by one from left to right. A lighting pattern indicating a high degree of expectation may be used. In addition, the specific lighting pattern may indicate the determination of the big hit.

  FIGS. 24 to 27 are diagrams showing a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at various positions. 24 to 27, a part of the game board 400, more specifically, a peripheral area of the decorative symbol display device 479 is extracted and displayed.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position. The movable body 710 is normally arranged at an initial position shown in FIG. Specifically, the initial position is a position at which the movable body 710 is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 479 in a game machine front view. Since most of the stage back cover 615 of the central structure 420 is configured to be transparent (light transmission), the movable body 710 disposed at the initial position visually recognizes a part of the movable body 710 via the stage back cover 615. it can.

  An enlarged view of the area E3 is shown in the lower part of FIG. When the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, when a passage connected to the outlet 627 and extending in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is viewed from the outlet 627, the central light emitting unit in the decorative symbol display device 779 is provided. A part of the character “779B” (see FIG. 23) formed on 779A is visually recognized. That is, since the outlet 627 is smaller than the size of the character 779B, the passage connected to the outlet 627 is configured to be transparent, and the periphery of the outlet 627 is configured to be opaque (light opaque). When the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, the character “779B” of the “appropriate”, not the whole, can be visually recognized through the outlet 627.

  FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position. The movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position shown in FIG. 25 when performing the variable display and the fixed display by the decorative symbol display device 779. The variable display position is a position where the movable body 710 overlaps most of the decorative symbol display device 479 when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and the decorative symbol display device 779 is exposed above the stage back cover 615. The variable display by the decorative symbol display device 779 is performed based on the entry of a game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 or the entry of a game ball into the right start winning device 432 under predetermined conditions.

  The operation of the movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) is controlled at the timing of starting the variable display by the decorative symbol display device 779, whereby the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position. Therefore, the movable body 710 placed at the initial position moves upward (that is, rises) from the initial position and is placed at the variable display position. At this time, the moving pattern of the movable body 710 ascending to the variable display position may be made different depending on the degree of expectation of the big hit. For example, a movement pattern in which the movable body 710 rises while swinging left and right may be a movement pattern that shows a higher degree of expectation than a movement pattern in which the movable body 710 rises linearly.

  The movable body 710 arranged at the variable display position is set to a game state at that time, such as an initial position or an intermediate position described later, at a predetermined timing when the arrangement is released, such as after execution of the fixed display by the decorative symbol display device 779. Moved to the appropriate position.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a case where the movable body 710 is disposed at an intermediate position. The intermediate position is a position between the initial position (see FIG. 24) and the variable display position (see FIG. 25). Therefore, an area where the movable body 710 arranged at the intermediate position overlaps the decorative symbol display device 479 is smaller than an area where the movable body 710 arranged at the variable display position overlaps the decorative symbol display device 479.

  When there is a possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the operation of the movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) is controlled, whereby the movable body 710 is arranged at the intermediate position. Therefore, the movable body 710 placed at the initial position moves upward from the initial position and is placed at the intermediate position. In the present embodiment, when the contact sensors 662 (see FIG. 10) provided on the left distribution path 622A and the right distribution path 622B of the distribution device 622 detect the passage of the game ball, It is assumed that there is a possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle start winning device 632.

  The movable body 710 disposed at the intermediate position is moved to the intermediate position at a predetermined timing such as after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, one second), or at a predetermined timing for releasing the arrangement, such as an initial position or a variable display position. It is moved to a position corresponding to the current gaming state.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating a case where the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position. The movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position shown in FIG. 27 when the game ball enters the lower stage 625. The irradiation position is a position where the decorative design display device 779 of the movable body 710 can illuminate the rolling surface of the stage 625. Since the plurality of light emitting portions 779A in the decorative symbol display device 779 are arranged substantially along the shape of the rolling surface of the stage 625 as viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the stage 625 can be arranged by disposing the movable body 710 at the irradiation position. Can be suitably illuminated.

  When the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625 is performed, the operation of the movable body driving device 721 (see FIG. 10) is controlled, whereby the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position. Therefore, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves upward from the initial position and is arranged at the irradiation position. In this embodiment, when the contact sensor 665 (see FIG. 10) provided on the passage near the exit of the left warp passage 628 detects the passage of the game ball, the game ball is sorted by the stage 625. Suppose

  The movable body 710 arranged at the irradiation position is at a predetermined timing at which the arrangement is released, such as when the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625 is completed, at an initial position or at a variable display position, etc., according to the game state at that time. Moved to

  An enlarged view of the area E4 is shown in the lower part of FIG. When the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position, when a passage connected to the entrance 626 and extending in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is viewed from the entrance 626, the central light emitting unit in the decorative symbol display device 779 is provided. A part of the character “779B” (see FIG. 23) formed on 779A is visually recognized.

  That is, the entrance 626 is smaller than the size of the character 779B, the passage connected to the entrance 626 is configured to be transparent, and the area 615A formed around the entrance 626 in the stage back cover 615 (hatched hatching). ) Is configured to be opaque, so that when the movable body 710 is disposed at the irradiation position, the player does not use the entirety of the character You will see part of it. In particular, in the present embodiment, the player can visually recognize, via the entrance 626, an upper portion of the character 779B of “this” as if it were a downward arrow (that is, “↓”). Become.

  Next, the operation and effect of the operation of the movable body 710 in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 100, when there is a possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the movable body 710 moves above the initial position (see FIG. 24), so that the player can move the movable body 710 upward. The occurrence of the approach possibility can be recognized from the moving direction of 710 (in the present embodiment, from above).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning device 632, so that the player can obtain a chance to acquire a large amount of game value. However, since the upper middle start winning device 632 is set to have a lower probability of the game ball entering than the lower middle start winning device 431, the player's line of sight is the lower middle start winning device in which the game ball is easy to enter. It is easy to turn to the device 431, and a situation arises in which the player easily misses the entry of the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632. In particular, since the decorative symbol display device 479 is interposed between the upper middle starting winning device 632 and the lower middle starting winning device 431, the player's consciousness of the upper middle starting winning device 632 having a low probability of entering is high. It becomes even easier to fade.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the player can recognize the occurrence of the entry possibility from the moving direction of the movable body 710, so that the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning device 632. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking (that is, the start condition for the second special symbol lottery is satisfied). That is, the player can easily witness the entry of the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632. Thereby, the interest of the game in which the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning device 632 can be suitably obtained.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632, a higher value (game value) can be expected than when a game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431. Also in the above, it is easy to witness the passing of the game ball to the upper middle start winning device 632, so that the interest of the game in which the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632 can be suitably obtained.

  The movable body 710 on which the decorative symbol display device 779 is disposed is used as a component indicating that the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 has occurred. It is not necessary to provide such components, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  The moving direction of the movable body 710 when the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 is changed is as follows: the movable body 710 moves from the initial position to the second special symbol using the decorative symbol display device 779. Since the direction is toward the position for performing the variable display and the fixed display of the unit game according to (i.e., the variable display position shown in FIG. 25), the upward movement of the movable body 710 is determined by the second special symbol lottery. Can be intuitively recognized as being related to the establishment of the start condition for (i.e., the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632).

  In particular, since the moving direction of the movable body 710 in such a case is on the side where the upper middle start winning device 632 is located (that is, upward), the player's line of sight is adjusted in accordance with the movement of the movable body 710. 632. Thereby, the player can witness the approach of the game ball to the upper middle starting winning device 632 with a suitable probability.

  Also, when a game ball passing through the left distribution path 622A or the right distribution path 622B of the distribution device 622 is detected by the contact sensor 662, there is a possibility that the game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632. Since the movable body 710 is moved, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the distribution of the game balls by the stage 622C (distribution device 622) related to whether or not the game balls pass through the upper middle starting winning device 632. Can be. This allows the player to enjoy a game in which game balls are distributed by the stage 622C.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the movable body 710 is located at an intermediate position (see FIG. 26) different from the variable display position, so that it is movable. Depending on the position of the body 710, the movement of the movable body 710 is performed based on the occurrence of the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632, or the movement is performed by the decorative symbol display device 779 to perform a variable display. It is possible to make the player distinguish whether or not the player has played. Therefore, the player can appropriately recognize the occurrence of the entry possibility.

  Such an intermediate position is a position where the movable body 710 overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 479, which is one of the positions where the player can easily pay attention. It is easy to recognize the moving movable body 710, and thereby, it is possible to suitably recognize that the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 has occurred.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 100, when the game balls are sorted by the stage 625, the movable body 710 is arranged at the irradiation position (see FIG. 27), and the light emitting unit 779A of the decorative symbol display device 779 emits light. The rolling surface 625 is illuminated. Therefore, the game ball to be distributed by the stage 625 rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the light emitting unit 779A.

  Since the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625 is related to the establishment of the start condition for the first special symbol lottery (that is, the entry of the game balls into the lower middle start winning device 431), the player is required to perform the lower middle start winning device. Attention is paid to the distribution of the game balls by the stage 625 while expecting the game balls to enter the 431. Thus, when the game ball rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the light emitting unit 779A, the light illuminating the rolling surface causes the player to expect the game ball to enter the lower middle starting winning device 431. Function as As a result, the player's sense of expectation is raised, and the interest in the game of distributing the game balls by the stage 625 can be appropriately improved.

  Next, the operation and effect of the decorative symbol display device 779 disposed on the movable body 710 in the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, the variation display of the unit game related to the second special symbol and the confirmation display (stop display indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery) are performed by the decorative symbol display device 779 arranged on the movable body 710. Since it is displayed using, the variable display and the fixed display of the unit game relating to the special symbol give the player a higher interest than the conventional typical gaming machine displayed on the screen such as the decorative symbol display device 479. Can be given.

  In addition, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position or the irradiation position, the player visually recognizes a part of the character “779B”, not the whole, through the outlet 627 or the entrance 626. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at these positions, the player can change the character 779B formed on the surface of the central light emitting portion 779A to the original second special symbol lottery result with a big hit. It is difficult to recognize that it is the character of "this" indicating that there is.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the movable body 710 moves the variable display position such as the initial position or the irradiation position (that is, the variation of the unit game according to the second special symbol using the decorative symbol display device 779). (Position for performing display and confirmation display), the character 779B visually recognized through the outlet 627 or the entrance 626 is visually recognized as a content that does not indicate a big hit. Even if the decorative symbol display device 779 is not in a state of displaying the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the big hit has been obtained by looking at the decorative symbol display device 779. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being meaninglessly discouraged by erroneously recognizing the lottery result, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced due to such erroneous recognition.

  Recognizing the character 779B as a content that does not indicate a big hit is a relatively simple configuration in which the character 779B is visually recognized through the outlet 627 or the entrance 626 instead of being controlled to change to a different character. Can be realized. In particular, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in order to make the character 779B visible as a content that does not indicate a big hit, the front side of the gaming machine connected to the passage of the gaming ball, such as the discharge port 627 or the entrance 626, is used. Since the opening is used, there is no need to provide a dedicated opening (window portion), and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Further, the entrance 626 and the exit 627 are the entrance and exit of the passage for discharging the game ball rolling the stage 625 to the upstream side of the lower middle starting winning device 431, so that the entrance 626 or the exit Although the character 799B visually recognized from 627 is visually recognized as a content that does not indicate a big hit, the character 799B is partially recognized from the entrance 626 or the discharge port 627, so that the entrance 626 or the discharge port is detected. The player can pay attention to the superiority of the game ball passing through 627.

  In particular, when the movable body 710 is in the irradiation position, the character 779B, part of which is visually recognized through the entrance 626, is visually recognized as if it is a downward arrow (that is, “↓”). The player can associate the entrance 626 with the lower middle starting winning device 431 located below the entrance 626. Therefore, the player can have a great sense of expectation regarding the right to the first special symbol lottery for the game ball that has entered the entrance 626.

<Change of display position of decorative pattern according to position of movable body 710>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27 again, a change in the display position of the decorative symbol according to the position of the movable body 710 will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479, three symbol columns of left, middle and right are displayed as decorative symbols Z. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (for example, numbers). The decorative symbol Z is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 by scrolling these symbols for each symbol row, for example.

  The decorative symbol Z may be composed of three or more symbols, and the direction in which the symbol columns are arranged is not limited to the left and right direction. Further, the symbols in each symbol row are not limited to numbers, and may be, for example, cards in which numbers are drawn, or characters. In addition, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is not limited to a mode in which the symbol is scrolled for each symbol row, and, for example, a pattern in which the symbol rotates on the spot on the spot and the content of the symbol switches each time the symbol is switched by the rotation. There may be.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position is located below the decorative symbol display device 479 and does not overlap with the decorative symbol display device 479. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, the variable display or the fixed display based on the decorative symbol Z is displayed at the default position (maximum size) of the decorative symbol display device 479 at a substantially central default position.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 27, the irradiation position of the movable body 710 is such that the movable body 710 arranged at the irradiation position overlaps the decorative symbol Z displayed at the default position on the decorative symbol display device 479 with a default size. Position. That is, also when the movable body 710 is arranged at the initial position, the variable display or the fixed display by the decorative symbol Z is displayed at the default position on the decorative symbol display device 479 with a default size.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, since the movable body 710 arranged at the variable display position overlaps most of the decorative symbol display device 479 in the front view of the gaming machine, the decorative symbol display device 479 is exposed to the player. The area to perform is limited. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position, the decorative symbol Z of the reduced size is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)). Are displayed in the exposure area (the upper right area in the example shown in FIG. 25). Thereby, when the movable body 710 is arranged at the variable display position, it is possible to prevent the fixed display of the decorative symbol Z from being hidden behind the movable body 710 and becoming invisible.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the movable body 710 is disposed at the intermediate position, the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 479 is exposed, but the movable body 710 overlaps the lower side. Therefore, when the movable body 710 is disposed at the intermediate position, the decorative symbol Z of the reduced size is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 by the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)). It is displayed in the exposed area left above. Therefore, for example, when the movable body 710 arranged at the initial position moves to the intermediate position, the decorative symbol Z also moves upward with the movement.

  As described above, the movable body 710 is disposed at the intermediate position when a possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs. Therefore, by moving the decorative symbol Z upward in response to the movable body 710 being disposed at the intermediate position, the player can pay attention to the upper middle starting winning device 632 located above.

  For example, in the case where the variable display of the decorative symbol Z in the unit game relating to the first special symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, depending on the possibility that the game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632. The variable display being executed is continued by the reduced-sized decorative symbol Z at the upper position on the decorative symbol display device 479. That is, in such a case, at the upper position on the decorative symbol display device 479, the variable display with the decorative symbol Z of the reduced size is performed. When there is a possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle starting prize device 632 in a state in which neither the decorative symbol display device 479 nor the decorative symbol display device 779 has performed the variable display (so-called customer waiting standby state). Alternatively, the reduced size decorative symbol Z may be displayed at an upper position on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  As shown in FIG. 26, when the movable body 710 is disposed at the intermediate position, the control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) is provided above the decorative symbol display device 479. ), The arrows 731 and 732 pointing upward are displayed together with the decorative symbol Z. Thereby, the player's attention to the upper middle start winning device 632 can be further increased.

  In addition, since the arrows 731 and 732 point upward, the player can be made aware that the decorative symbol Z is moving upward. Also in this regard, the player's attention to the upper middle starting winning device 632 can be further increased. In particular, in the example shown in FIG. 26, the left arrow 731 points to the upper right, and the right arrow 732 points to the upper left, and the degree of attention to the decorative symbol Z displayed between these arrows 731 and 732 is more preferable. To increase.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 in which the display position of the decorative symbol changes according to the position of the movable body 710 will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100, when there is a possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the decorative symbol Z displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 moves upward. The occurrence of the approach possibility can be recognized from the movement and the movement direction of the vehicle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the entry of the game ball into the upper middle start winning device 632 (that is, the player does not miss the start condition for the second special symbol lottery). That is, the player can easily witness the entry of the game ball into the upper middle starting winning device 632. Thereby, the interest of the game in which the game ball enters the upper middle starting winning device 632 can be suitably obtained.

  In addition, the upper middle starting winning device 632 in which the probability that the game ball enters is lower than that of the lower middle starting winning device 431, is a place where the player easily misses the entering of the game ball, as described above. Since the player can witness the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 with a suitable probability by moving the decorative symbol Z, the game in which the game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632 is provided. Can be more suitably improved.

  In particular, since the decorative symbol Z displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 indicates the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, it is one of the places where the player is most likely to be conscious. Therefore, since the player can catch the movement of the decorative symbol Z with a high probability, it is more preferable that by moving the decorative symbol Z, the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs. Can be recognized by the player.

  Further, since the occurrence of the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 is indicated to the player using the decorative symbol Z indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery, it is indicated in the second special symbol lottery. Giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the entry of the game ball into the related starting winning device (upper middle starting winning device 632), simultaneously with an expectation regarding the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery which is not related to the second special symbol lottery. Can be.

  Also, since the moving direction of the decorative symbol Z is on the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located (that is, upward), the player's line of sight is adjusted to the moving direction of the decorative symbol Z to the upper middle starting winning device 632. And can be directed to nature. Thereby, the player can witness the approach of the game ball to the upper middle starting winning device 632 with a suitable probability.

  When the decoration symbol Z is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 479 due to the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632, the decoration symbol Z of the reduced size is displayed. Can be largely secured as an area where the decorative symbol Z is not displayed. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs, not only the decorative symbol Z is moved upward, but also the movable body 710 is moved to the intermediate position as described above. By moving the player, the player's consciousness can be more strongly directed to the upper side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is arranged. Thereby, it is possible to more appropriately make the player recognize that the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 has occurred.

<Game state transition control>
Next, with reference to FIG. 28 to FIG. 30, an example of the transition control of the gaming state in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present invention will be described in more detail. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the relationship between the lottery content of special symbols and the transitioning gaming state.

  The transition control of the game state is performed by the control of the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). Numerical data and control programs related to the transition of each game state such as the winning probability and the distribution probability are stored in the ROM of the main control board 920. Is stored in The main control board 920 generates a normal gaming state, a special gaming state, and a time-saving gaming state as gaming states of the pachinko machine 100. The transition from the normal gaming state to another gaming state is executed with the win of the jackpot lottery relating to the special symbol as an opportunity, and when the jackpot lottery is won in the normal gaming state, the time-saving game is performed via the special gaming state. State or return to the normal game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100, as the lottery relating to the special symbol, a lottery relating to the first special symbol and a lottery relating to the second special symbol are executed. As shown in FIG. 28, the lottery relating to the special symbol is executed according to the same winning probability (approximately 1/23) regardless of the symbol type, and a range in which the winning random number counter can take a value (for example, "0 to 0"). 65535 "), a winning value (for example," 0 to 2859 ") is determined in advance, and the winning probability of the jackpot is determined by the ratio of this range to the winning value.

  In the case of winning the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 28, one jackpot type is selected from the jackpot types set to the seven types of the first jackpots 1 to 5 and the second jackpots 1 and 2. Is done. The jackpot type is determined for each type of special symbol, and the selection of the jackpot type when a lottery for each special symbol is won is performed according to predetermined selection conditions, and specifically, obtained based on a winning start. Is selected according to the value of the big hit symbol random number counter.

  As shown in FIG. 28, five types of first big hits 1 to 5 are set as the big hit types related to the first special symbol. The first big hits 1 to 5 are selected by lottery using the value of the big hit symbol random number counter so as to follow a predetermined distribution probability. As each distribution probability, for example, the first big hit 1 is “18.85%”, the first big hit 2 is “4.15%”, the first big hit 3 is “0.05%”, and the first big hit 4 is “51.30%” and the first big hit 5 are set to “25.65%”.

  As the special game state that occurs when the lottery according to the first special symbol is won, two kinds of special game states in which the average number of balls that can be acquired (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of acquired balls) are different are set. The special game state in which the number of obtained balls is small is constituted by a plurality of (four) rounds, and in each round, the winning opening is opened by taking the approach allowable posture in which the central large winning device 434 is operated for a short time, and the game ball is opened. The opening (short opening) of a short time (approximately 0.05 seconds) in which the player can hardly enter is shifted to the entry prohibition position as the end of one round, and the winning opening is closed. For this reason, even if the short opening round is repeated a plurality of times, the game ball does not enter the central special prize device 434, and the number of the ball that fired the game ball in the special game state is consumed.

  The special game state in which the number of obtained balls is large is constituted by a plurality of (three) rounds, and in each round, the central large prize winning device 434 takes an entry allowable posture for a longer time than the round in the short open special game state. The winning opening will be opened. In the long open special game state, the winning opening of the central large winning device 434 is opened to start a round, and a predetermined maximum approach allowable time (for example, 29.5 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, When eight (8) game balls are detected by the special winning switch 443, the game is shifted to the entry prohibition position as the end of one round, and the winning opening is closed. For this reason, when the long open round is repeated a plurality of times, the game balls enter the central special winning device 434 in proportion to the number of rounds, and in the special game state, the player has a substantially constant number of balls (147). ) Game balls.

  When the lottery related to the first special symbol is won, a case where the time saving game state occurs after the special game state and a case where the time saving game state does not occur (that is, the case where the number of time savings is 0) are set. Have been. Also, whether or not the time-saving gaming state occurs and the number of times of saving correspond to the gaming state in which it is determined whether or not to generate the time-saving gaming state. The conditions are set such that the time-saving gaming state is more likely to occur in the case of winning.

  Specifically, when the lottery related to the first special symbol in the non-hour reduction state is won and the first big hits 1, 4 are selected, the number of times reduced is set to “0”, and the special game state is set. Later, the normal gaming state is started. When the lottery related to the first special symbol in the non-time saving state is won and the first big hits 2, 3 and 5 are selected, the game shifts to the time saving game state, and when the number of time savings is the first big hits 2, 5 Transitions to the time saving game state of "1 time", and in the case of the first big hit 3, "87 times". The number of times saved is the maximum number of times that the lottery related to the special symbol is continuously executed in the time saving game state that has transited after the special game state, and the upper limit at which the lottery related to the special symbol can be consecutively not won. Matches the number. Until the number of time savings is reached, if the lottery related to the special symbol becomes non-winning, the time saving game state ends and returns to the normal game state. The average value of the number of time savings to be added when the lottery for the first special symbol in the non-time saving state is won is the sum of the value obtained by multiplying the distribution probability in each first big hit by the number of time savings in the non-time saving state. , Which is approximately 0.34 times.

  In the case of winning the lottery relating to the first special symbol in the time reduction state, the number of time savings which is longer than that in the case of winning the lottery relating to the first special symbol in the non-time saving state is more likely to be selected. Even if a selection is made, the number of times saved is set to “87 times”. The average value of the number of time savings added when the lottery related to the first special symbol in the time saving state is won is also represented by the sum of the value obtained by multiplying the distribution probability in each first big hit by the number of time savings in the time saving state. 87 times.

  If the big hit types related to the first special symbol are roughly classified according to the number of time reductions, the distribution ratios of the first big hits 1, 4 corresponding to “0 times” are “18.85%” and “51.30%”. The first and second big hits 2,5 corresponding to "70.15%" and "1 time" are "29.8%" with "4.15%" and "25.65%" added. , "87 times", the distribution ratio of the first big hit 3 is "0.05%". For this reason, when the lottery for the first special symbol is won, “0 times” is selected and the transition to the time saving game state is most frequently occupied by about 70%, and “30 times” with a lower probability of about 30%. "Is a specially advantageous gaming state in which" 87 times "rarely occurs.

  The special game state generated when the lottery according to the second special symbol is won is set to be more advantageous for the player than when the lottery according to the first special symbol is won. As shown in FIG. 28, two types of jackpots according to the second special symbol are set as second jackpots 1 and 2, and the second jackpots 1 and 2 are jackpot symbols according to a predetermined distribution probability. It is selected by lottery using the value of the random number counter. As the distribution probabilities, the second big hit 1 is set to "75.00%", and the second big hit 2 is set to "25.00%".

  As the special game state that occurs when the lottery according to the second special symbol is won, two kinds of special game states in which the number of obtainable balls (the number of obtained balls) is different are set. Each special game state is constituted by a plurality of rounds having different numbers of times, and in each round, the central large prize winning device 434 takes a long open approach allowing posture in which a certain number of game balls can enter, and the winning opening is opened. You. The number of long open rounds is set to a plurality of 5 rounds (5R) and 3 rounds (3R). In the case of 5 rounds, "245" and in the case of 3 rounds, "147" Set to the number of acquired balls. Each round configuring the long open special game state according to the second special symbol is set to the same open and close conditions as the round configuring the long open special game state according to the first special symbol, and common control is performed. It is used. In addition, the special game state of three rounds of long opening according to the second special symbol is set to the same number of rounds as the special game state of long opening according to the first special symbol, and the same control can be used. .

  When the lottery according to the second special symbol is won, the condition for transitioning to the time saving game state after the special game state is set to be more advantageous for the player than when the lottery according to the first special symbol is won. ing. Specifically, when the lottery according to the second special symbol is won, it is set to transit to the time saving game state regardless of whether the player is in the non-time saving state or the time saving state. The probability of transition to the time-saving gaming state when winning is set to a high probability.

  The number of working hours is also set to be more advantageous for the player when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won than when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won. Specifically, when the lottery related to the second special symbol is won, the number of times reduced and the average value thereof are set to “87 times”, and the number of continuations is larger than when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won. The time-saving game state is set to be easily selected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the progress control of the gaming state will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the progress control of the gaming state. Here, FIG. 29 schematically shows establishment of main conditions in each game state and control of a device executed when the conditions are established. In each game state, a game technique necessary for a player is shown. Also shown.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, the normal game state is set. In the normal game state, a game is played by a left-handed game technique, and the lower ball middle starting winning device 431 or the upper middle starting winning device 632 according to the second special symbol is entered by a game ball to enter a special symbol. A start prize is generated, and a jackpot lottery is performed.

  When a game ball enters the lower middle start winning device 431, the first special symbol is a start winning (first starting winning), and a right to a unit game is generated and a lottery relating to the first special symbol is performed. Then, a variable display is performed in which a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed and displayed. The main control board 920 transmits a control command corresponding to the content of the variable display to the sub-control board 940, and the sub-control board 940 controls the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 24), and Using the symbols (1 to 9), an effect (normal symbol fluctuation effect) by a fluctuation display in which a combination of three numbers of left, middle, and right is a stop symbol is executed. The big hit lottery according to the first special symbol is won by approximately 1/23, and when the big hit lottery is won, the state is changed to the special game state.

  When the big hit lottery related to the first special symbol is won, one of two kinds of special game states of short opening and long opening occurs. The main control board 920 performs control for changing the posture of the lower central large winning device 434 (see FIG. 7) under conditions corresponding to the type of each special game state. By the control of the main control board 920, in the short open special game state, the player can hardly acquire the game ball, and there is almost no outgoing ball with which the game ball is paid out from the pachinko machine 100, while the long open special game state. In, a player can obtain a certain number or more of prize balls by playing a game by a right-handed game technique.

  Here, from the main control board 920 to the sub-control board 940, at least one of the timing of executing the variable display before each special game state occurs and the timing of starting the special game state, the big hit type A corresponding control command is transmitted, and the sub-control board 940 performs operation notification control of recognizing a jackpot type based on the control command and outputting information on an operation necessary for the player. Details of the operation notification control will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the special gaming state, the gaming state that changes according to the selected big hit type when the lottery related to the first special symbol is won is different. If the first big hit is 1 or 4, the normal gaming state is returned. On the other hand, if the first big hit is 2,5, the state shifts to the short time saving game state in which the time saving state continues until the timing of one change start, and if the first big hit is 3, 87 times is set as the upper limit number of games. The state transitions to the long time saving game state where the state continues.

  The short time reduction game state is configured by combining the time reduction state and the non-time reduction state. In the short time saving game state, the time saving state is set until the first change starts, and when the first change starts, the state changes from the time saving state to the non-time saving state.

  In the case of transition to the short time reduction game state, the game method differs depending on whether or not the right of the unit game relating to the special symbol is reserved at the start timing of the short time reduction game state. If the unit game right related to the special symbol has been held at least once, immediately after the start of the short-term time-saving gaming state, the jackpot determination related to the special symbol is executed for the first held unit game right, and the jackpot is won. If so, the jackpot type selection is also performed. Further, selection of the contents of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation time and the stop symbol) for the held unit game is also performed. The main control board 920 transmits a control command corresponding to the content of the variable display started during the short time reduction game state to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 779. The plurality of light emitting units 779A sequentially emit light, and finally the central light emitting unit 779A emits light to indicate the winning of the lottery relating to the special symbol, and finally any one of the light emitting units 779A shifted from the center emits light. Thus, an effect indicating non-winning (hereinafter, also referred to as whale roulette fluctuation effect) is executed.

  The whale roulette fluctuating effect is executed only once, which corresponds to the number of times of fluctuating display started during the short time-saving game state. When the whale roulette fluctuation effect is won, a big hit occurs and the game shifts to a special game state. When the whale roulette is not won (losing), a game using a left-handed game method (hereinafter, also referred to as a left-handed game) is performed. Return to the normal gaming state. Since the jackpot lottery related to the special symbol is won at approximately 1/23, when a whale roulette fluctuation effect occurs, the special game state is transitioned at approximately 1/23. The selection of the big hit type during the short time saving game state is performed during the time saving state. Therefore, even if any of the big hit types related to the first special symbol is selected, the long time saving game state is set after the special game state. Move to.

  In the case of transition to the short time saving game state, if the right of the unit game related to the special symbol has not been held for one time, the right of one unit game related to the special symbol is established after the short time saving game state is started. There is a need. In this one unit game, the probability of transitioning to the long time saving game state is approximately 1/23, and in the normal gaming state, mainly in the jackpot lottery relating to the first special symbol in which the start winning is generated, the unit game enters the long time saving game state. It is much higher than the probability of transition. Therefore, the player plays the game in hope of acquiring the right of the unit game as soon as possible. In this case, the time-saving state in which the right starting winning device 432 easily takes the approach allowable posture is continued until the execution of the one-time fluctuation display is started. Therefore, the player can enter the right start winning device 432 and a game area on the right side of the central structure 420 in which the starting device 436 for operating the right start winning device 432 (the area where the game ball flows down and flows down). With a right-handed game technique in which a game ball is caused to flow down into an area (refer to FIG. 7), it is possible to easily generate a start winning for one execution of the variable display and establish the right of the unit game.

  When the game ball enters the right start winning device 432 after transitioning to the short time game mode, a start winning prize of the second special symbol (second starting prize) is performed, and a jackpot determination according to the second special symbol is executed, and the jackpot is won. If so, the selection of the jackpot type is also performed, and the selection of the content of the fluctuation display (the fluctuation time and the stop symbol) is also performed. The main control board 920 transmits a control command corresponding to the content of the variable display started during the short time reduction game state to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 779. And perform a whale roulette fluctuation effect. In this case, the winning probability of the lottery related to the first special symbol and the winning probability of the lottery related to the second special symbol started in the short time reduction game state are set to the same probability (approximately 1/23). Also, the probability of transition to the long time saving game state after winning is set to be the same. For this reason, when the whale roulette fluctuation effect is executed, regardless of whether it is a unit game related to the first special symbol or a unit game related to the second special symbol, a long time reduction game with the same feeling of expectation A transition to the state can be expected, and even if the type of the special symbol is different, a lottery result is displayed by a common whale roulette variation effect, so that the progress of the game can be easily shown to the player.

  During the whale roulette fluctuating effect, the time saving state is not the time saving state but the non-time saving state, and the right starting winning device 432 is in a gaming state in which it is difficult to take the approach allowable posture compared to the time saving state. If even one ball wins the right start winning device 432 after the short-term time-saving gaming state occurs, and the second start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10) detects the winning of the game ball, the main control board 920 sets the time reduction. The control is switched from the state to the control of the right starting winning device 432 corresponding to the non-time saving state. For this reason, even if the game ball is continuously fired by the game by the right-handed game method (hereinafter also referred to as right-handed game), the game ball is easily consumed, and the player does not need to perform the shooting operation.

  When a result indicating the winning of the lottery relating to the special symbol is displayed in the whale roulette fluctuation effect, a special game state occurs. This special game state corresponds to any one of seven kinds of the first big hits 1 to 5 and the second big hits 1 and 2, and in the short open special game state in which the number of obtained balls is “0”, the special game state depends on the player. It is not necessary to launch game balls, and in a long open special game state in which the number of obtained balls is a certain number or more, a prize ball can be obtained by a right-handed game.

  After the special game state generated by winning the lottery related to the special symbol in the whale roulette fluctuating effect, the game is in the long and short time game state. The long-term time-saving gaming state is a time-saving state in which the right-start winning device 432 easily takes an entry-permissible attitude until the execution of the 87th variation display is started or the lottery related to the special symbol is won and transits to the special gaming state. Continue. The player can easily enter the game ball into the right starting winning device 432 by the right-handed game.

  When a game ball enters the right starting winning device 432 in the long-term time-saving gaming state, a starting special prize (second starting prize) of a second special symbol is generated, and a right for a unit game is generated and a lottery for the second special symbol is performed. Then, a variable display is performed in which the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result is definitely displayed. The main control board 920 transmits a control command corresponding to the content of the variable display to the sub-control board 940, and the sub-control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 24) to determine the normal game state. Using a different number design (for example, a design in which the numbers normally displayed in red are displayed in yellow), the effect of the variable display in which the combination of the three numbers of left, middle, and right is set as the stop design (the time reduction medium design fluctuation effect) ). The big hit lottery according to the second special symbol is won by approximately 1/23, and when the big hit lottery is won, the game is transited to the special game state, and thereafter, the long time and short time game state is started again.

  In the long-term time-saving gaming state, the starting winning of the second special symbol mainly occurs. For this reason, when the big hit lottery is won, it is easy to transition to the special game state in which the second big hits 1 and 2 are long open, and a prize ball can be obtained by continuing the right-handed game.

  When the stop symbol corresponding to the non-winning result is fixedly displayed in the variable display of the special symbol of 86 times from the start of the long time saving game state, and after the 87th variable display is started thereafter, the main control board 920 The control of the right starting winning device 432 is switched from the time saving game state to the control corresponding to the normal game state. For this reason, after the 87th variation display is started, even if the game ball is continuously fired by the right-handed game, the game ball is easily consumed, and the player does not need to perform the shooting operation. Then, when the stop symbol corresponding to the non-winning result is definitely displayed in the 87th variation display, the long and short time game state ends, and the game returns to the normal game state.

  As described above, as the transition pattern to the long and short time game state, the normal transition pattern that is triggered by the start winning of the first special symbol in the normal game state by the left-handed game has been described. The transition from the normal game state to the long and short time game state is also made according to the transition pattern.

  As another transition pattern, first, a transition pattern triggered by a case where a game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632 during the normal game state of the left-handed game is set. In this transition pattern, a game ball enters the upper middle start winning device 632 during the normal game state, and a start winning (second start winning) of the second special symbol is achieved. In the unit game related to the second start winning, a jackpot determination according to the second special symbol is executed, and if a jackpot has been won, a jackpot type selection is also performed, and the content of the variable display (variable time and stop symbol) is determined. Selection is also made. The main control board 920 transmits a control command corresponding to the content of the variable display during the normal game state according to the second special symbol to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 779. Control and execute the whale roulette fluctuation effect. As described above, the whale roulette fluctuating effect is provided when the start winning of the second special symbol occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning device 432 in the short time saving game state, and during the normal game state, the upper middle starting winning device. It is set so that the same effect is executed when the start winning of the second special symbol is generated by the entry of the game ball to the game ball 632.

  Here, in the lottery relating to the second special symbol, the probability of transition to the long time saving game state after the winning is set the same in both the non-time saving state and the time saving state (see FIG. 28). Therefore, when the whale roulette fluctuating effect is executed, which of the two start winning devices 432 and 632 according to the second special symbol is the entry of the game ball as the unit game according to the second special symbol? Regardless, it is possible to expect the transition to the long time reduction game state with the same feeling of expectation. Therefore, even if the game state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed is different, by displaying the lottery result by the common whale roulette fluctuation effect, it is determined that the transition probabilities to the long and short time game state are equal. Can be easily understood.

  Further, as another transition pattern to the long and short time game state, a game ball enters the lower middle starting winning device 431 during the normal game state by the left-handed game, and the lottery according to the first special symbol is won. The case where the first big hit 3 is selected as the big hit type selected in is set. In the case of this transition pattern, unlike the other transition patterns, the transition is made to the long and short time game state without going through the whale roulette fluctuation effect. For this reason, the player can not only visually recognize the winning by the whale roulette fluctuating effect in the long and short time game state, but also can provide a gaming property that expects an unexpected transition pattern.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 100 includes the first big hits 2, 5 that transition to the short-time time saving game state according to the selection condition in the non-time-saving state corresponding to the normal game state as the big hit type related to the first special symbol, The first big hits 1 to 5 that transition to the long time saving game state according to the selection condition in the time saving state corresponding to the time saving game state are provided, and as the big hit type according to the second special symbol, either the normal gaming state or the short time saving game state Also, a big hit (second big hit 1, 2) that transitions to a long time saving game state is provided. For this reason, it is provided with a game property in which a plurality of times of game balls enter the lower middle start winning device 431 as a start winning prize of the first special symbol to gradually transition to a long time saving game state via a short time saving game state. On the other hand, it is possible to add the gaming property of transitioning to the long and short time game state according to one lottery result by the entry of the game ball into the right starting winning device 432.

  Next, the control of the main control board 920 at the start of the short time reduction game state will be described in more detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 30 is a timing chart showing the control of the main control board 920 at the start of the short time reduction game state. The control at the start of the short-term time-saving gaming state is executed as a part of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 12) executed by the main control board 920. The control of the short time saving game state is different depending on whether or not the right of the unit game related to the special symbol is reserved, and FIG. 30 (A) shows the case where the right of the unit game is reserved at the start of the short time gaming state. ) Will be mainly described, and then a case where there is no unit game right reservation will be mainly described with reference to FIG.

  The main control board 920 is provided with a plurality of flags (a part of the RAM of the main control board 920) as a plurality of storage means for storing a game state in progress. A special game state flag that is turned on and a time reduction state flag that is turned on during the time reduction state are provided. The short-term time-saving gaming state is a gaming state to which a transition is made in a part of the case where a big hit is won based on the winning start of the first special symbol.

  When all the rounds constituting the special game state corresponding to the winning of the big hit are completed, and the subsequent ending period ends, it is time to end the special game state. As shown in FIG. 30A, the main control board 920 turns off the special game state flag and turns on the time reduction state flag to start the short time reduction game state.

  When the right of the unit game is reserved at the start of the short time reduction game state, the variable display related to the special symbol can be started by ending the special game state. The main control board 920 executes the jackpot determination / type selection and the content setting of the variable display corresponding to the reserved unit game right during the time saving state, and executes the special symbol display in the special symbol display device 471 (see FIG. 7). Is changed from a stopped state to a changed state (see FIG. 30A). At the timing of switching the fluctuating state, the main control board 920 transmits a control command to the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10), and the fluctuating state of the decorative symbol display device 779 is switched from stopped to fluctuating.

  When the first variable display in the short-term time-saving game state is started, the main control board 920 turns off the time-saving state flag (see FIG. 30A), and the game ball easily enters the right starting winning device 432. The control corresponding to the non-time reduction state, which is more difficult than the time reduction state, is started. The process of setting the first variation display and the process of setting the time-saving state flag from ON to OFF are performed in such a manner that the right starting prize device 432 takes the entry allowable posture and the game ball starts right. It is preferably executed in a short time so as not to enter the winning device 432, and is preferably executed in one timer interrupt process of the main control board 920.

  When the game ball enters the starting device 436 (see FIG. 7) relating to the ordinary symbol while the time reduction state flag is off, the starting switch 446 (see FIG. 10) is temporarily turned off as shown in FIG. The main control board 920 detects that the game ball enters the starting device 436 when it is turned on. When the start switch 446 is turned on, a fluctuation display related to a normal symbol is executed. If the lottery related to the normal symbol is won, the right entry restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) is turned on, and the right start winning device 432 (FIG. 7) takes an approach allowable posture corresponding to the non-time saving state.

  Here, it is preferable to set the time (fluctuation time) of one fluctuation display related to the normal symbol in the non-time saving state to the same selection condition as the fluctuation time in the time reduction state to simplify the control related to the normal symbol. . In addition, the fluctuation time in the time reduction state as the fluctuation time related to the normal symbol may be set to less than about 1.0 second, and preferably less than 0.1 second, and the game related to the first special symbol in the short time reduction game state It is preferable to make the start of the game earlier, whereby the player can smoothly progress the game and suppress a decline in the player's mood caused by spending a lot of time until the start winning.

  Next, a case where the right of the unit game is not reserved at the start of the short time reduction game state will be described. When the ending period of the special game state ends, the main control board 920 turns off the special game state flag and turns on the time reduction state flag to start the short time reduction game state, as shown in FIG. When the short time reduction game state is started, the variable display relating to the special symbol can be started. However, the main control board 920 does not have the right of the held unit game, and waits for the generation of the start winning.

  In a situation where the time-saving state flag is turned on and the time-saving state is continued, when the player performs a right-handed game, the downflow area (see FIG. 7) in which the starting device 436 and the right-start winning device 432 are arranged. A game ball flows down. When a game ball enters the starting device 436 during the time reduction state, as shown in FIG. 30B, the starting switch 446 is temporarily turned on, and the entry of the game ball to the starting device 436 causes the main control board 920 to enter. Is detected. When the start switch 446 is turned on, a fluctuation display related to a normal symbol is executed. If the lottery related to the normal symbol has been won, the right entry restriction solenoid 463 is turned on, and the right start winning device 432 enters an entry corresponding to the time reduction state. Take an acceptable posture.

  The approach allowable posture for one winning in the time saving state is set to a time (approximately 2.4 seconds) sufficiently longer than the firing time interval of the game balls (approximately 0.6 seconds). For this reason, the game ball easily enters the right start winning device 432, and the approach of the game ball is detected by the second start winning switch 442. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the second start winning switch 442, the start winning of the second special symbol is achieved, and the main control board 920 responds to the unit game right generated by the starting winning during the time reduction state. Then, the special symbol display device 472 (see FIG. 10) changes the state of the special symbol from being stopped to changing (see FIG. 30B).

  Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected by the second start winning switch 442, the main control board 920 turns off the time saving state flag, and switches from the time saving state to the control of the right starting winning device 432 corresponding to the non-time saving state. . As a result, even if the subsequent lottery for the normal symbol is won, the right start winning device 432 takes an approach allowable posture corresponding to the non-time saving state, and the first special symbol in the short time saving game state has one start winning. It is easy to limit by the time the variable display is executed.

  In addition, when the right of the unit game is not reserved at the start of the short time reduction game state, the starting winning of the second special symbol is easily limited to only once. Specifically, as the control of the right approach restriction solenoid 463 by the main control board 920, the approach of one game ball to the right start winning device 432 in the situation where the approach allowable posture is taken during the time saving state is the second start. When detected by the prize switch 442, the main control board 920 turns off the right entry restriction solenoid 463 so as to shift the entry allowed attitude to the entry prohibited attitude even before the maximum allowed time has elapsed. That is, the maximum allowable number of entry to the right start winning device 432 in the time reduction state is set to the number (one) necessary for the number of times of performing the fluctuation display of the short time reduction game state, and the right start winning device is larger than the required number. The configuration is such that it is easy to prevent a game ball from entering the 432.

  As described above, in the case where the short time saving game state occurs, if one fluctuation display reaching the upper limit of the number of time savings (upper limit number of games) is suspended at the start of the game, immediately after the start of the short time saving game state. At the start of the execution of the variable display, the time-saving state flag is turned off, and the control of the right starting winning device 432 changes from the control corresponding to the time-saving state (easy entry control) to the non-time-saving state. It is changed to control (normal approach control). Also, when the fluctuation display is started during the short-term time-saving game state, the time-saving state flag is turned off, and the control of the right start winning device 432 is changed from the easy entry control to the normal entry control. For this reason, when the first fluctuation display that reaches the upper limit of the number of time savings (the upper limit number of games) is executed during the short time-saving game state, the right start winning device 432 is easily entered by the normal entry control. That is, even if the player executes the right-handed game, the game ball hardly enters the right starting winning device 432. Therefore, in the short-time and short-time gaming state, the player can perform the operation of entering the game ball into the game area and concentrate his or her consciousness on the variable display during execution and the display of the result information. Therefore, a display corresponding to the winning is displayed as the result information of the fluctuation display, and it is possible to easily increase the expectation of transition to the long and short time game state.

  The timing for turning off the time saving state flag corresponding to the upper limit number of games in the short time saving game state and the control in which the control of the start winning device 432 is changed from the easy entry control to the normal entry control are in the long time saving game state. Is the same control as the 87th process corresponding to the number of up and down games, has the same effect, and the description is omitted.

<Notification control of operation instruction information>
Next, operation notification control by the sub-control board 940 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the operation notification control processing by the sub control board 940.

  Like the main control board 920, the control processing in the sub-control board 940 is roughly divided into a main process started upon return from a power failure state and a command executed when a command from the main control board 920 is received. It is composed of an interrupt process and a timer interrupt process that is executed by interrupting the main process periodically (in this embodiment, at a period of 10 ms (milliseconds)). The operation notification control process is configured as a part of a timer interrupt process, and is a control command corresponding to each game state being executed from the main control board 920 and a control related to the content of a variable display transmitted regarding execution of a unit game. Executed based on command.

  The operation notification control process is a process provided for the player to easily obtain the game value that can be obtained regardless of his or her experience and to suppress the consumption of extra game balls. In this operation notification control processing, the player is notified of the necessity of the firing operation and whether the left-handed game or the right-handed game requires a game.

  First, the types of operation notification by the operation notification control of the sub-control board 940 will be described. As the operation notification, three types are set: left-handed information output, right-handed information output, and firing unnecessary information output.

  The left-hand information output is executed by outputting information instructing a left-hand game for the player. Specifically, the display of characters indicating a left-handed game, such as "Please return to left-handed", is illustrated on a part (for example, the left end) of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. In addition, a passage through which game balls flow down by a left-handed game including a top plate decoration 611, an upper left front decoration 612, and an upper right front decoration 613 (see FIG. 13) provided above the central structure 420 (see FIG. 7). The light-emitting body provided on the member may be turned on to indicate the falling area of the game ball. In addition, the luminous bodies provided in the starting device 436, the right starting winning device 432, and the right large winning device 433 arranged in the flowing region of the game ball by the right-handed game are dimmed or turned off, and the game ball is caused to flow down. An area may be indicated.

  Further, the output of the left strike information may be executed by the output of sound by the audio devices 281 and 282 (see FIG. 10). Specifically, when the left-handed game is advantageous to the player and the right-handed game is detected by the sub-control board 940 via the main control board 920 (for example, when the game ball enters the starting device 436). ), Repeat the audio output such as "Please return to left-handed" or "Please fire aiming to the left" a certain number of times (for example, twice) or until execution of left-handed game is detected Alternatively, the player may be instructed to execute a left-handed game.

  The output of the right-handed information is also executed by the output of information instructing the right-handed game, similarly to the left-handed information output. For example, the decoration pattern display device 479 (see FIG. 7) is arranged in a downflow area of a right-handed game ball in which a character such as “Please right-click” is displayed on a part (for example, the right end) of the screen. The luminous bodies provided in the starting device 436, the right starting winning device 432, and the right large winning device 433 (see FIG. 7) emit light from the state of the left-handed information output and overlap with the downflow area of the game ball by the left-handed game. This is executed by at least one of information output such that a light emitting body provided is dimmed or turned off, or a sound of right-handed information output is output by the acoustic devices 281 and 282 (see FIG. 10).

  The output of the firing unnecessary information is performed by generating a state indicating to the player that firing is unnecessary. For example, characters such as “no firing required” are displayed on a part (for example, right and left ends) of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7). This is executed by at least one of information output such that all of the light-emitting bodies provided to overlap are dimmed or extinguished, or sound of “no emission is required” is output by the audio devices 281 and 282 (see FIG. 10).

  In the operation notification control process, as shown in FIG. 31, first, it is determined whether or not the game is in the special game state or the time saving state (S2001). It is determined whether a roulette fluctuation effect is being performed (in FIG. 31, a roulette fluctuation effect is being performed) (S2002).

  If the whale roulette fluctuating effect is being performed in the process of S2002 (S2002: Y), the process proceeds to the firing unnecessary notification process S2003. In the unnecessary emission notification process S2003, the unnecessary emission information corresponding to the unnecessary emission state is output. During the whale roulette fluctuation production, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the right starting winning device 432 even if a right-handed game is performed because the game is in a non-time-saving game state, the starting condition is almost not satisfied, and it is difficult to obtain a prize ball. is there. In addition, since it is possible to make a big hit with a probability of approximately 1/23 and to transition to the long time saving game state via the special game state, the player stops the firing operation and waits until the lottery result is displayed. It is possible to provide a gaming ability that allows the player to pay attention to the roulette fluctuation effect and raises the expectation in the process until the result is displayed.

  In the processing of S2002, when it is determined that the whale roulette fluctuating effect is not being performed (S2002: N), it is determined whether or not the game is in the long-term time-saving game state and is fluctuating for the 87th time corresponding to the final round. Then (S2004), if it is during the 87th change (S2004: Y), the emission unnecessary notification process S2003 is executed. In addition, during the execution of the fluctuation display of the last round in the long time saving game state, the non-hour saving state is in effect, and even if a right-handed game is performed, the game ball is difficult to enter the right start winning device 432 and the starting condition is almost satisfied. It is also difficult to obtain prize balls. Also, since the big hit type is selected in accordance with the condition related to the second special symbol in the last round of the long time saving game state, it is more advantageous for the player than after the non-winning in the variable display and the transition to the normal game state. It is easy to shift to a long and short game time. For this reason, the player is required to stop the firing operation and pay attention to the symbol fluctuation effect during the time reduction until the lottery result is displayed, and to provide a gaming ability that can enhance expectation in the process until the result is displayed. Can be.

  Also, during the whale roulette fluctuating effect and during the last time fluctuation display during the long-term time-saving game state, if the left-handed information output is executed just because it is in the non-hours-saving state, it is as if the last time fluctuation display is not displayed. The result of the winning may be given to the player as to whether or not the result is indicated before the result is displayed, thereby giving a bad impression to the player. In addition, when the last variation display has been won, the player must play the right-handed game again, so when the left-handed information output is executed, the operation of switching between the left and right game techniques becomes frequent, and in this respect, However, it may give a bad impression to the player as urging the useless operation. Therefore, it is preferable to execute the firing unnecessary notification process S2003 in a part of the non-time saving state.

  When it is determined in the processing of S2004 that the long and short time game state is not the 87th change (S2004: N), it is necessary to execute the left-handed game in the normal game state. In this case, it is determined whether or not a right-handed game has been executed (S2005). If a right-handed game has been executed (S2005: Y), a left-handed instruction sound output process is performed as a left-handed sound output. The process is executed (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2007. Thereby, without paying attention to the game area, it is possible to easily indicate to a player who has been interested in something other than the game, such as touching a mobile phone, that the game is not being properly performed. On the other hand, in the process of S2005, if the right-handed game is not executed (S2005N), the left-handed notification process S2007 is executed, and then the operation notification control process is ended.

  In the left-handed notification process S2007, a notification that can be visually recognized by the player is performed as left-handed information output. For this reason, if the player does not visually recognize the game board 400 (see FIG. 7) as compared with the instruction by voice output, the player cannot recognize the left-handed information output, but suggests that the player needs a left-handed game. can do.

  In the processing of S2001, when it is determined that the game is in the special game state or the time reduction state (S2001: Y), it is determined whether the game is in the short time reduction game state (S2011). S2011: Y), right-handed instruction sound output processing S2012 is executed as a part of right-handed information output, and then right-handed notification processing S2013 for visually recognizable notification of the player as right-handed information output is executed. Then, the operation notification control processing ends. Thus, during the short time and short game state, the execution of the right-handed game is instructed by the voice output and the information output by the display.

  In the processing of S2011, when it is determined that the game is not in the short time reduction game state (S2011: N), it is determined whether the game is in the special game state (S2021), and when it is in the special game state (S2021: Y). ), It is determined whether or not the ending period of the first big hits 2 and 5 is present (S2022). If it is not during the ending period of the first big hits 2 and 5 (S2022: N), the special gaming state is the first big hit. It is determined whether this is due to 1-3 (S2023).

  If it is determined in the processing of S2023 that the game is not in the special gaming state by the first big hits 1 to 3 (S2023: N), the player is in the middle of the long opening special gaming states 4 and 5 and the right-handed game is performed. This is a situation where a game ball can be obtained by entering the game ball into the winning device 434. In this case, it is determined whether the left-handed game is being executed (S2024), and if the execution of the left-handed game is detected (S2024: Y), the right-handed instruction sound output processing S2012 and the right-handed notifying processing are performed. By executing S2013, execution of the right-handed game is instructed. In the processing of S2024, if execution of the left-handed game is not detected (S2024: N), right-handed instruction sound output processing S2012 is skipped and right-handed notification processing S2013 is executed.

  Here, the left-hitting instruction voice output processing S2006 determines the execution of the left-handed game by a general prize device 639 capable of detecting a game ball by the execution of the left-handed game, the contact sensor 665 of the left warp passage 628, and the like. When passage is detected, audio output for a certain period of time is set, and once audio output is set, audio output for a certain period of time is performed by another control process in timer interrupt processing. Be executed. The same applies to the right-turn instruction voice output process S2012.

  In the processing of S2023, when it is determined that the first big hits 1 to 3 are in the special game state (S2023: Y), the firing unnecessary notification processing S2003 is executed. In the special gaming states of the first big hits 1 to 3, since the number of acquired balls is 0, the player refraines from launching the game balls based on the information output of the unnecessary firing in the unnecessary firing notification process S2003, and the extra game is performed. The consumption of the sphere can be suppressed.

  In the processing of S2021, when it is determined that the special game state is not being performed (S2021: N), it is determined whether or not the number of times of holding the execution of the unit game related to the special symbol (number of times of holding) is equal to or more than the number of remaining working hours. (S2025).

  Here, the sub-control board 940 illuminates and displays, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 479, the lighting units corresponding to the number of times of suspension among the lighting units corresponding to the maximum number of times of suspension for each type of special symbol. The control of the lighting display of the number of suspensions is performed by the sub control board 940 recognizing the number of suspensions based on the number of suspensions transmitted from the main control board 920 and a control command capable of identifying the symbol type. To update the number of lighting indications. The control command capable of identifying the number of holdings and the symbol type is transmitted from the main control board 920 to the sub-control board 940 at the timing when the number of holdings is increased based on the special symbol starting winning and the timing when the variable display is started. .

  In addition, the number of remaining working hours is the remaining number of times that the variable display can be executed in the time saving gaming state. In the case where the short time saving game state and the long time saving game state are started, at the start timing, the start of the time saving game state and the remaining number of times the variable display can be executed in the time saving game state are identified from the main control board 920. A possible control command is transmitted to the sub control board 940, and the sub control board 940 can recognize the start of the time saving game state and whether the time saving game state is the short time game mode or the long time game mode. ing. After the time saving game state is started, at the timing when the variable display is started, the main control board 920 transmits a control command capable of identifying the number of remaining working hours reduced by one by performing the variable display, and The board 940 can recognize the number of remaining working hours after updating by executing the variable display.

  In the process of S2025, if it is determined that the number of suspensions is less than the number of remaining working hours (S2025: N), the process proceeds to the process of S2024, and a right-handed game is instructed by the processes of S2024, S2012, and S2013. When the number of times of suspension is less than the number of remaining working hours, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the right starting winning device 432 in order to execute the fluctuation display in the time saving gaming state. Due to the situation in which the right-handed game is easily entered, prompt execution of the right-handed game is encouraged.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2025 that the number of suspensions is equal to or greater than the number of remaining working hours (S2025: Y), the flow shifts to the processing of S2003, and the firing unnecessary notification processing S2003 is executed. If the number of times of suspension is equal to or more than the number of remaining working hours, it is a situation that a start winning which needs to be executed in the time saving game state has already occurred. Prevent firing of game balls. This makes it easier to end the time-saving gaming state with the number of times close to the number of executable times set in advance as the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation where the execution of the variable display as the time saving game state is performed extra, and to encourage the player to perform a right-handed game only during a period necessary for the time saving game state, Therefore, the pachinko machine 100 can be easily operated in a form close to the winning probability in the set time-saving gaming state.

  Also in the process of S2022, when it is determined that the ending period of the first big hits 2 and 5 is in progress (S2022: Y), it is determined whether or not the number of suspensions is equal to or more than the number of remaining working hours by the process of S2025 (S2025). If the number of suspensions is equal to or greater than the number of remaining working hours (S2025: Y), the firing unnecessary notification processing S2003 is executed. Since the first big hits 2, 5 transit to the short time-saving game state after the special game state, if the number of times of suspension is updated to 1 or more corresponding to the number of remaining time savings executed in the short time-saving game state, the right Since it is not necessary to continue the beating game and consume the game balls during the ending period, the consumption of the game balls can be reduced by outputting information that does not require firing. Note that when the ending period of the first big hit 4 is in progress, the firing unnecessary notification processing S2003 may be executed regardless of whether or not the number of suspensions is equal to or more than the number of remaining working hours. Also, in a situation where the game state transits to the normal game state after, the consumption of the game ball can be suppressed.

  In the process of S2022, when it is determined that the ending period of the first big hits 2, 5 is in progress (S2022: Y), and when it is determined by the process of S2025 that the number of suspensions is less than the remaining working hours, S2025: N), the process proceeds to S2024, and a right-handed game is instructed by the processes in S2024, S2012 and S2013. As a result, it is possible to easily generate a special winning prize necessary for executing the short time reduction game state immediately after the start of the short time reduction game state.

  Here, if the period from the occurrence of the first big hit via the normal symbol fluctuation effect to the execution of the second fluctuation display by the whale roulette fluctuation effect becomes longer, the time during which the fluctuation display is stopped is Even if the expectation for the transition to the long time saving game state due to the occurrence of the second big hit is once increased by the first big hit, the expectation may be reduced. On the other hand, by performing the processing of S2022 and S2025, it is determined that the right-handed game is continued from the ending period before the start of the short-term time-saving game state, thereby starting the special symbol necessary for the execution of the short-time time-saving game state Can be easily generated at an early stage, and the sense of expectation in the second variable display can be easily maintained.

  As described above, the sub-control board 940 performs the left-handed notification process as the operation notification control process, which performs a visually recognizable notification of the player as the output of the left-handed information corresponding to the execution of the left-handed game in the normal game state. S2007, a right-handed notification process S2013 for performing a visually recognizable notification of the player as right-handed information corresponding to execution of a right-handed game in the special game state and the time-saving game state, and the first big hit 2,5 Before the end of the special game state corresponding to the ending of the game or before the end of the long time saving game state, the upper limit (upper limit number of games) of the number of time savings is reached in the short time saving game state or the long time saving game state which subsequently transitions. In the case where the execution of the fluctuation display for the number of remaining times required before is suspended (S2025: Y), the emission unnecessary notification processing S2003 is performed without outputting the right-handed information. Determination processing for generating a time to run and a (S2025).

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be modified and implemented as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to the embodiment, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to the embodiment.

  (1) In the above embodiment, the flow-down regulating unit 623 is configured to receive the game balls distributed by the roof 611B and the distribution device 622. However, the flow-down regulation unit 623 is not necessarily configured by the roof 611B and the distribution device 622. It is not necessary to have a configuration in which game balls distributed by the game are received. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which game balls flowing down the upper game area are directly received.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the game balls distributed to the left or right by the roof 611B are all discharged to the left game area via the flow-down regulating portion 623. However, the game balls distributed to the right. Does not necessarily have to pass through the flow-down regulating portion 623. For example, the game balls distributed to the right side by the roof 611B may be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100.

  In recent years, due to enlargement of the central structure and the like, there is a tendency that the size and arrangement of a region in which a game ball flows down in the game region is limited. However, like the pachinko machine 100 of the above-described embodiment, the roof 611B has Since the game balls distributed to either the left or right are guided to the common game area (that is, the left game area), the limited game area can be effectively used.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the configuration is such that game balls are sorted by the roof 611B (first sorting unit) and the sorting device 622 (second sorting unit). No need to provide. For example, the distribution unit may include only the roof 611B. In such a case, it may be configured such that the starting winning of the second special symbol is established based on the game ball having entered the passing opening 621.

  (4) In the above embodiment, the roof 611B having the upwardly convex curved shape is adopted as the first distribution unit for distributing the game balls flowing down the upper game area. However, the shape of the first distribution unit Is not necessarily limited to an upwardly convex curved shape. For example, it may be a stage or a croon that distributes the first distribution unit to one of the left side, the right side, and the passage opening. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which a game ball is distributed to one of a left side, a right side, and a passage opening by the movement of a movable object that moves in a predetermined direction.

  (5) In the above embodiment, the game balls distributed to the left or right by the roof 611B are guided to the left game area by the flow-down regulating unit 623, but the destination guided by the flow-down regulating unit 623 is not necessarily required. It is not necessary to limit to the game area near the entrance of the game area (that is, the exit of the firing passage 401B), that is, the left game area which is the game area from the left side with respect to the central structure 420.

  For example, when the entrance of the game area is provided on the right side, that is, when the game ball is fired from the right side, the flow-down regulating unit 623 moves the game ball distributed by the roof 611B to the central structure 420. It may be configured to guide the player to a game area from the right side (hereinafter also referred to as “right game area”). Also in this modification, similarly to the pachinko machine 100 of the above embodiment, the game balls distributed to the side farther from the entrance of the game area (that is, the left side) are changed to the right game area which is the game area closer to the entrance. Can be entered.

  (6) In the above embodiment, the game balls distributed to either the left or right by the roof 611B are guided to the left game area by the common flow-down regulating portion 623, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the game balls fall to different flow-down regulating portions when the game balls are distributed to the left side by the roof 611 and when the game balls are distributed to the right side.

  In this modification, the flow-down regulating unit in which the game balls distributed to the left fall, and the flow-down regulating unit in which the game balls distributed to the right fall, even if their inclined surfaces have the same inclination angle, Different inclination angles may be used. By setting the inclination angles of the inclined surfaces of the flow-down regulating portions to different angles, the acceleration modes of the game balls discharged from the outlets of the respective flow-down regulating portions can be made different.

  Further, the downflow regulation section where the game balls distributed to the left fall and the downflow regulation section where the game balls distributed to the right fall may be arranged in a substantially C shape in a front view of the pachinko machine 100. Good. In such a case, it is discharged to the left game area or the right game area according to the direction of the distribution.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, the downflow restricting portion 623 has a configuration in which the inclined surface is inclined downward from right to left. However, if the game ball can move to the left on the downflow restricting portion 623 by its own weight. However, it is not always necessary to limit the downward slope from right to left. For example, the slope of the flow-down regulating portion 623 may have a shape such as a curve or a wave such that the game ball can move to the left side under its own weight on the flow-down regulating portion 623. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball is carried to the left game area by moving the movable body.

  (8) In the above embodiment, the upper middle start winning device 632 is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction. However, the upper middle start winning device 632 does not necessarily need to be configured to be movable. For example, the upper middle start winning device 632 may be fixedly provided at a predetermined position (ie, does not move).

  (9) In the above embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper middle starting winning device 632 are configured to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper middle start winning device 632 may be penetrated in a direction facing the entrance, and the game ball that has entered the upper middle start winning device 632 may fall on the flow-down regulating portion 623. According to such a modification, it is possible not only to enter the upper middle start winning device 632 but also to enter the lower middle start winning device 431 in the left game area.

  (10) In the above embodiment, the upper middle starting winning device 632 is configured as a starting winning device related to the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be configured as a general prize winning device for giving a ball.

  (11) In the above embodiment, a plurality of protrusions 612D and 613D are provided in a direction intersecting a continuous direction of the left and right flow-down passages 652 and 653. There is no need to limit. For example, a configuration in which one protruding portion 612D, 613D is provided in each of the downstream passages 652, 653 may be adopted. In the example illustrated in FIG. 15, the number of the protrusions 612 </ b> D and 613 </ b> D provided in each of the downstream passages 652 and 653 is five, but the number is not limited as long as at least one is provided.

  (12) In the above embodiment, the protrusions 612D, 613D are erected on the back side of each of the decorative main bodies 612A, 613A, and the portions corresponding to the bottom surfaces of the protrusions 612D, 613D are visually recognized as dark portions, thereby serving as passage display portions. Although the configuration is made to function, the function as the passage display unit is not necessarily limited to being visually recognized as a dark part. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a streak extending in the continuous direction of the flow-down passages 652 and 653 is formed on the back side of each of the decorative bodies 612A and 613A with a coloring agent having low light transmittance. Alternatively, the streak extending in the continuous direction of the flow-down passages 652, 653 may be visually recognized by the player by causing the decoration main bodies 612A, 613A to emit light so as to be distinguishable from the light for decoration.

  (13) In the above-described embodiment, the continuously extending (that is, a series of) streaks caused by the bottom surfaces of the protrusions 612D and 613D are configured to be visually recognized by the player as the passage display unit. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. No need. For example, the path display unit may be configured so that a streak extending intermittently (that is, a dotted line) in the continuous direction of the flow-down paths 652 and 653 is visually recognized by the player as the path display unit.

  (14) In the above embodiment, the protrusions 612D, 613D are provided inside the central structure 420, more specifically, on the left and right flow passages 652, 653 provided on the rear side of the upper left front decoration 612 and the upper right front decoration 613. Although the configuration is used in which the path display is used, the path for displaying the path by the path display unit is not necessarily limited to the path provided inside the central structure 420. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a passage that is displayed on a passage display unit such as a protrusion is displayed for a passage that passes through a structure other than the central structure 420.

  (15) In the above embodiment, the passage display using the protrusions 612D and 613D is performed on the flow-down passages 652 and 653 extending in the vertical direction when the pachinko machine 100 is viewed from the front. Is not necessarily limited to a passage extending in the vertical direction. For example, for a passage extending from the upper left to the lower right such that the game ball can reach the exit by its own weight, a passage display by a passage display unit such as a protrusion may be displayed.

  (16) In the above embodiment, the surfaces of the decoration main bodies 612A and 613A are configured as undulating surfaces, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the surfaces of the decoration bodies 612A and 613A may be smooth surfaces without undulations.

  (17) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 determines whether the first special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol starting winning or the second special symbol lottery based on the second special symbol starting winning. Although the decorative pattern is configured to be displayed, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the decorative symbol display device 479 displays a decorative symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery based on the first special symbol starting winning, and the second special symbol lottery based on the second special symbol starting winning. The result of may be displayed on another decorative design display device 779.

  (18) In the above embodiment, the general winning device 639 is provided at a position where the passing possibility is different depending on the position of the game ball received by the flow-down regulating unit 623, but the game ball received by the flow-down regulating unit 623 is provided. It is not always necessary to limit the device provided at a position where the possibility of passing differs according to the position of the general winning device. For example, a start-up prize-winning device, such as a lower-side start-up prize-winning device 431, to which a lottery right is given based on the entry (that is, a start-winning prize-winning device according to a special symbol), It is good also as composition provided in a position where passage possibility differs according to a position.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the entrance (passage port 621) of the upper middle starting winning device 632 is provided above the distribution unit (first distribution unit) by the roof 611B has been described. It is not necessary to provide at the position, it may be provided on the side (right side or left side) of the upper middle starting winning device 632 corresponding to the downstream side of the distribution unit by the roof 611B, and the number of entrances is limited to one The number may be two or more.

  (20) In the above embodiment, the two stages 622C and 625 are configured to be arranged vertically, but the arrangement of these stages is not necessarily limited to the upper and lower sides, and the stages corresponding to the stages are arranged downstream of the stages. An appropriate arrangement can be taken according to the position of various winning devices, such as a starting winning device, which is arranged in a row. Even if the stages 622C and 625 are not arranged vertically, if the game ball distributed by one of the stages does not enter the corresponding prize device arranged on the downstream side of the stage, the game It is preferable to provide a path through which the ball can be guided to the other stage.

  In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 479 is interposed between the stages 622C and 625. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The decorative symbol display device 479 is sandwiched between the stage 622C and the stage 625. It may be arranged without.

  (21) In the above embodiment, the two stages 622C and 625 have a configuration in which the rolling surfaces of the game balls have similar rolling shapes with respect to the rolling behavior of the game balls. The shape may not be a shape similar to the rolling behavior of the game ball.

  (22) In the above embodiment, each of the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 has a configuration in which the rolling surface includes an uneven surface including a convex surface and concave surfaces disposed on the left and right of the convex surface. , 625 need not necessarily include the above-mentioned uneven surface, and may have various shapes as long as the rolling surface functions as a stage on which the game ball rolls while reciprocating left and right. Can be adopted.

  (23) In the above embodiment, when a game ball distributed by the upper stage 622C does not enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the game ball is moved to the flow-down regulating section 623, the left game area, and the left warp. By moving the passage 628 to the downstream side by its own weight, it is configured to be guided to the lower stage 625. However, as a route for guiding the game balls distributed by the upper stage 622C to the lower stage 625, The path is not necessarily limited to the path using the weight of the ball, and may be a path using a movable body that can receive a game ball.

  (24) In the above embodiment, among the concave portions formed on the upper and lower stages 622C and 625, the discharging direction of the game ball in the middle concave portions 622D and 625A is different, but the concave portions are formed on the respective stages 622C and 625. The discharge directions of the concave portions may all be the same. The number of concave portions formed on the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 is not limited to three as exemplified in the above embodiment, but may be an appropriate number such as two or less or four or more. In addition, the number of the concave portions having different discharge directions in the upper and lower stages 622C and 625 is not limited to one (the concave portions 622D and 625A) illustrated in the above embodiment, and may be two or more.

  (25) In the above embodiment, the lower middle starting winning device 431 arranged downstream of the stage 625 is fixedly provided, whereas the upper middle starting winning device 632 arranged downstream of the stage 622C is Although it is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction, a configuration in which these medium-start winning devices 431 and 632 are all fixedly provided, or a configuration in which both reciprocate in the left-right direction may be used.

  (26) In the above embodiment, the contact sensor 662 is exemplified as a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through the left distribution path 622A and the right distribution path 622B. However, various sensors such as an optical sensor and a magnetic sensor can be adopted. Similarly, the contact sensor 665 is not limited to the contact sensor as long as it can detect a game ball, and various sensors such as an optical sensor and a magnetic sensor can be adopted.

  (27) In the above-described embodiment, the contact sensor 662 is provided on each of the left distribution passage 622A and the right distribution passage 622B. However, any position where a game ball entering the stage 622C can be detected. However, the position is not limited to the position exemplified in the above embodiment, and an appropriate position can be adopted as the arrangement position of the contact sensor 662. For example, the contact sensor 662 may be provided on a passage before branching from the passage port 621 to the left distribution passage 622A or the right distribution passage 622B. According to such a modification, only one contact sensor 662 may be installed. Further, a configuration is also possible in which a contact sensor is provided on the stage 622C to detect a game ball that has entered the passage 621 and reached the stage 622C.

  Similarly, the lower stage 625 is configured such that the contact sensor 665 is disposed on the passage near the exit of the left warp passage 628 in the above embodiment, but at a position where a game ball entering the stage 625 can be detected. If there is, the position is not limited to the position exemplified in the above embodiment, and an appropriate position can be adopted as the arrangement position of the contact sensor 665. For example, a contact sensor or an optical sensor may be provided at the entrance of the left warp passage 628 to detect a game ball entering the left warp passage 628. Further, a configuration is also possible in which a contact sensor is provided on the stage 625 to detect a game ball that has entered the stage 625 via the left warp passage 628.

  (28) In the above embodiment, when the game ball enters the stage 625, it is necessary to pass through the left warp passage 628. However, the game ball distributed by the stage 622C enters the upper middle start winning device 632. If not, the game ball may be guided to the stage 622C by another route other than the left warp passage 628.

  (29) In the above embodiment, when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs, the movement of the movable body 710 and the movement of the decorative symbol Z displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479. Is performed to suggest the occurrence of the possibility of entry, but by moving one of the movable body 710 and the decorative symbol Z without moving both, the occurrence of the possibility of entry is suggested. It is good also as a structure which performs.

  (30) In the above embodiment, when the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 is generated, the movable body 710 is moved upward, which is the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located. However, the moving direction of the movable body 710 is not necessarily limited to the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located. For example, when such a possibility of entry occurs, the movable body 710 may be moved in a predetermined direction to indicate that fact. The same applies to the moving direction of the decorative symbol Z.

  (31) In the above embodiment, the moving direction of the movable body 710 when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 is the direction from the initial position to the variable display position is described. However, the direction may be different from the direction from the initial position to the variable display position.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, the movable body 710 having the decorative symbol display device 779 and capable of performing the variation display of the second special symbol is provided with a possibility that the game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632. It was diverted as a movable body to be moved in the case of. Instead of this, a configuration may be adopted in which a movable body dedicated to move in such a case is provided as the movable body that is moved when the possibility of entry is generated.

  In the above-described embodiment, the movable body 710 located at the intermediate position or the like is configured to overlap the decorative symbol display device 479. However, the movable member 710 may not overlap the decorative symbol display device 479 in the moving range of the movable member 710. . That is, the movable body 710 may be configured to move without overlapping the decorative symbol display device 479.

  (33) In the above embodiment, there is a possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 and a case where the second special symbol is fluctuated and displayed using the decorative symbol display device 779. Although the configuration is such that the body 710 is arranged at a different position (that is, the intermediate position and the variable display position), in any case, the movable body 710 may be arranged at the same position. In such a modification, for example, the possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632 causes the movable body 710 to be positioned at a predetermined position (for example, a position corresponding to a variable display position), and then, When the second special symbol lottery performed by entering the upper middle starting prize device 632 as a result of the possibility of entry is a big hit and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved Alternatively, a variable display using the decorative symbol display device 779 may be performed at the predetermined position without moving the movable body 710.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle start winning device 632 occurs, and the case where the game ball is distributed by the stage 625 (the lower middle start winning device 431). And the movable body 710 is arranged at different positions (that is, the intermediate position and the irradiation position), but in any case, the movable body 710 is the same. It is good also as composition arranged in a position.

  (35) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 779 is configured from the plurality of light emitting units 779A arranged in the left-right direction. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this configuration. For example, the decorative symbol display device 779 may include a single light-emitting unit that includes a plurality of light-emitting bodies and extends in the left-right direction. Alternatively, the decorative symbol display device 779 may have a configuration in which one or a plurality of light emitting units 779A are arranged in various modes. It is preferable that at least a part of the plurality of light emitting portions 779A or one light emitting portion extending in the left-right direction is in conformity with the shape of the rolling surface of the stage 625 as viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

  (36) In the above embodiment, when the possibility of the game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs, the decorative symbol Z is reduced and moved, but the decorative symbol Z is not reduced. It may be configured to move.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 occurs, the movable symbol 710 disposed at the intermediate position in the decorative symbol display device 479 does not overlap. The decorative pattern Z is displayed. It is not always necessary that the movable body 710 disposed at the intermediate position does not overlap with the decorative symbol Z after the movement, and the movable member 710 may overlap the decorative symbol Z.

  (37) In the above embodiment, when there is a possibility that a game ball can enter the upper middle starting winning device 632, the decorative symbol Z is reduced and moved, and the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located ( That is, although the arrows 731 and 732 indicating the upward direction are displayed, various characters (for example, a hand pointing upward and an eyeball pointing upward) instead of the arrows 731 and 732 may be used as the character pointing upward. Can be adopted.

  In the above embodiment, the arrows 731 and 732 indicating the upper left or the upper right are displayed. However, if the arrow indicates the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located (that is, the upper side), the arrow indicates the upper right. It may be an arrow. Further, in the above embodiment, the arrows 731 and 732 are displayed on the left and right of the decorative symbol Z. However, any position that can indicate the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located can be set as appropriate. It can be adopted as the display position of the arrows 731 and 732.

  (38) In the above-described embodiment, when the possibility of a game ball entering the upper middle starting winning device 632 is generated, the decoration symbol Z of the reduced size is moved upward, so that the decoration symbol Z on the lower side of the decoration symbol display device 479 is moved. An area where the decorative pattern Z is not displayed is formed, and the movable body 710 at the intermediate position is overlapped with the area. Alternatively, in such a case, an arrow indicating the side where the upper middle starting winning device 632 is located may be displayed in an area where the decorative symbol Z is not displayed on the lower side of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  (39) In the above embodiment, the content of the character 779B is information that can notify that a big hit has occurred. However, the content of the character 779B can notify a specific advantageous result when the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is obtained. If the content is appropriate, the content may indicate anything other than the jackpot.

  (40) In the above embodiment, the character “779B” of “this” is adopted as the information that can notify that a big hit has occurred. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various characters can be adopted as the character 779B. For example, the character 779B can adopt a character such as “V” as the character 779B. Note that the information such as “this” that can notify of a big hit may be provided on the surface of the light emitting unit 779A in a planar manner by printing or the like, or may be formed by undulation on the surface of the light emitting unit 779A. May be performed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the character 779B fixedly formed on the surface of the light emitting unit 779A is the information that can be notified of the big hit, but the color of the light emitting unit 779A (for example, the color of the cover or the light emitting color) ) May be information that can notify that a big hit has occurred. In such a modified example, for example, a color filter is arranged in front of the light emitting unit 779A, and the light emitting unit 779A is visually recognized through the color filter, so that the player can visually recognize the content as not the content indicating the big hit.

  (41) In the above embodiment, the entrance 626 or the discharge port 627 is smaller than the size of the character 779B, and the periphery of the entrance 626 or the discharge port 627 is made to be an opaque area. The configuration is such that only a part of the character 779B is visually recognized, whereby the content of the character 779B is visually recognized as the content that is not originally contained in the character 779B (that is, the content indicating that it is a big hit). The configuration is not limited to the configuration illustrated in the above embodiment as long as the content of the character 779B can be visually recognized as the content not originally included in the character 779B. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a curved surface of the passage is interposed between the entrance 626 or the outlet 627 and the character 779B to be displayed, so that the content of the character 779B changes and is visually recognized by refraction by the curved surface. .

  (42) In the above embodiment, when the movable body 710 is at the irradiation position, the content visually recognized through the entrance 626 is an arrow pointing to the side of the lower middle starting winning device 431 (that is, downward) (that is, the downward direction). , “↓”), but when the movable body 710 is in the initial position, the content of the arrow pointing downward is not visible through the outlet 627. Also when the movable body 710 is at the initial position, similarly to the case where the movable body 710 is at the irradiation position, the content may be configured so as to be an arrow pointing downward.

  (43) In the above embodiment, the entrance 626 and the outlet 627 are configured as windows for changing the contents of the characters 779B, but a configuration may be such that a dedicated window for changing the contents of the characters 779B is provided.

  (44) In the above embodiment, the configuration in which the time-saving game state ends when the preset upper limit number of games is reached has been described. However, the condition for ending the time-saving game state is necessarily satisfied by the number of games. It is not necessary, and alternatively, or in addition to this, the time-saving gaming state may be terminated by the satisfaction of another predetermined termination condition. For example, a time-short game state in which an end lottery in which an end condition is satisfied with a predetermined end probability (for example, approximately 1/40) for each unit game may be performed for each change, may be included. The end probabilities may be made different to include a plurality of types of time-saving gaming states having different advantageous degrees. In addition, a configuration that includes a time-saving game state of a type that continues until the next big hit lottery is won may be adopted.

  (45) In the above embodiment, the short time-saving game state is set to one time-saving number. However, the number of time-saving times need not always be one, and may be set to two or more times. In this case, it is preferable that the number of times reduced in the short time reduction game state is configured such that sufficient unit game rights are reserved before the start of the short time reduction game state. It is preferably set to one half (for example, twice) or less, and more preferably once.

  (46) In the above embodiment, the short-term time-saving gaming state is set to a condition that makes it easier for the player to transition to a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, and the special gaming state is set as this setting. Has been described, the average value of the number of time savings in the time-saving game state transitioning after is set longer than the winning in the normal game state, but it is not always necessary to adopt this configuration, but the transition to the game state advantageous to the player is performed. It is preferable to set other conditions that facilitate the operation. That is, instead of or in addition to the configuration according to the above-described embodiment, the number of obtained balls given to the player before returning to the normal game state by one big hit may be set, In the special game state, a jackpot type with a large number of obtained balls may be set so as to be easily selected, or the game state may be set so as to easily transition to a game state in which it is easy to win a big hit by transitioning to a probable change game state, or a normal game state. Each of the above settings that are more advantageous for the player may be set in combination of a plurality of types. If a plurality of game states can occur before returning to the normal game state, the number of balls obtained (expected number of balls) as the expected value (average value) in the specification is one in the normal game state. It is preferable that one big hit winning in at least one of the short time saving game state and the long time saving game state is set higher than the big hit winning.

  (47) In the above embodiment, the number of time savings in the time saving game state that transits after the special game state (specifically, the average number of times of one big hit winning that can be counted based on the distribution probability of the big hit type) is set to the non-time saving state. The setting has been described that is changed between the time saving state and the time saving state, and is different depending on the symbol type. However, it is not always necessary to adopt this configuration, and at least one of the gaming state and the symbol type may be set as a common setting. Alternatively, the difference in the number of time savings depending on the symbol type may be eliminated.

  (48) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the first big hits 1 to 5 and the second big hits 1 and 2 are set as the big hit types has been described. However, instead of at least part of these, or at least these In addition to a part, other jackpot types with different numbers of acquired balls and different number of times saved may be included.

  (49) In the above embodiment, a description will be given of a configuration in which a transition to the long time reduction game state is achieved with a 100% probability of winning according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the short time reduction game state and the long time reduction state. However, it is not always necessary to make a transition to the long time saving game state with a probability of 100%, and a configuration including a big hit type that transitions to a game state other than the long time saving game state (for example, a short time saving game state) as a part of the winning. It is good. In this case, it is preferable that the condition in which the big hit type is selected in the time-saving game state is a condition in which the player easily transitions to a gaming state more advantageous to the player than the condition in which the big hit type is selected in the normal game state. In addition, when comparing the condition in which the jackpot type is selected according to the short-term time-saving game state and the condition in the long-term time-saving game state, the condition in the long-term time-short game state is a condition in which the transition to the more advantageous gaming state is more easily performed. Is preferred.

  (50) In the above embodiment, when the whale roulette fluctuating effect using the common decorative symbol display device 779 is executed as the fluctuating effect during the short time-saving gaming state related to the start winning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a common variable effect may be performed while providing a separate decorative symbol display device for each symbol type, or at least a variable display or a result display on the common decorative symbol display device. A variation effect in which one of the display modes is different may be executed.

  (51) In the above embodiment, the configuration in which a total of two kinds of symbol types of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set has been described, but a single symbol type (for example, only the first special symbol only) is used as the symbol type. ), Or three or more symbol types may be set. Further, the number of the starting devices for generating the starting winning in each symbol type may be set to one or two or more. In this case, at least one of the starting devices is provided with an entry control mechanism and a drive unit (for example, an entry control solenoid or a motor) for making the ease of entry of the game ball different between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a state can be generated. For example, the right starting winning device 432 and the upper middle starting winning device 632 may be omitted, and only the lower middle starting winning device 431 may be configured. In this case, the lower middle starting winning device 431 is used to play game balls. An entry restricting mechanism and a driving means for varying the ease of entry may be provided.

  Alternatively, the right starting prize device 432 may be omitted, and an entry control mechanism and a driving unit may be provided for making the ease of entry of the game ball different from that of the upper middle starting prize device 632. In this case, the entry of the game ball from the roof 611 </ b> B as the first distribution unit to the passage port 621 as an entry control mechanism for making the entry of the game ball different from the upper middle starting winning device 632. The size of the passage 621 may be switched to a plurality of stages so that the ease is different, so that the time-saving game state may be generated, or the entrance of the upper middle starting winning device 632 or the entrance thereof. Another entrance is provided in a section further downstream and upstream of the second start winning switch 642 (for example, a game ball passing on an inclined surface of the flow-down regulating portion 623 is provided), and these entrances are provided. The size may be switched to a plurality of stages so that a time-saving gaming state can be generated.

  (52) In the above embodiment, the case where the jackpot lottery is performed with a winning probability of approximately 1/23 for the start winning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been described. Alternatively, a different winning probability may be set for each symbol type. When the winning is set with the same probability in a plurality of symbol types, it is preferable that at least a part of the control be shared, such as by using a common counter for the lottery, because the control can be simplified. In this case, it is necessary to win the jackpot lottery twice consecutively for the first special symbol starting prize as a probability of transition to the long time saving game state, from the viewpoint of maintaining the player's willingness to continue playing. It is preferable to set the winning probability to a high probability. The winning probability may be set to a probability higher than approximately 1/50, more preferably to a probability higher than approximately 1/30, and approximately 25/25. It is preferable to set the probability higher than 1.

  In addition, as the display indicating the success / failure result of the jackpot lottery relating to the starting winning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of the plurality of light emitting units 779A is apparently corresponding to the high winning probability. It is preferable that the reciprocal of the winning probability be smaller than the winning probability, and the reciprocal of the winning probability be 70% or less, more preferably 50% or less. Further, it is preferable that the number of the plurality of light emitting units 779A does not significantly differ from the winning probability in appearance. It is preferable that the number is smaller than the reciprocal of the winning probability by about 20% or more. It is preferably at least 30%, more preferably at least 40%. The above embodiment exemplifies a case where there are eleven pieces corresponding to about 48% of about 23 corresponding to the reciprocal of the winning probability of about 1/23.

  (53) In the above embodiment, the maximum allowable number of game balls entering the right starting winning device 432 in the time reduction state is set to the same number as the number of time reductions in the short time reduction game state. Alternatively, when the number of times saved in the short-term time-saving game state is two or more, it is preferable to set the number of times saved less than the number of times saved. In this case, by controlling the time saving state on the main control board 920, it is possible to match the number of times saved in the short time saving game state or set the number smaller than the number of times saved as the maximum allowable number in the short time saving game state. This is preferable because it is easy to avoid a situation where the game ball enters the device 432 more than the number of times saved.

  (54) In the above embodiment, when the start switch 446 detects that the maximum permissible number of game balls has entered after the right starting winning device 432 has shifted to the entry permissible attitude, it shifts to the entry prohibition attitude, and Although the configuration in which the entry of the game ball is rejected has been described, instead of this, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the same number (for example, one) of the game balls as the number of time savings in the short time-saving game state sets the approach allowable posture. The right entry control mechanism 452 takes support at the entrance of the right starting prize device 432, and the subsequent game balls are brought into contact with the supported game balls and guided in other directions. When the time elapses, the right starting winning device 432 may take an entry prohibited position, and only the supported number of game balls may enter the right starting winning device 432.

  (55) In the above-described embodiment, when the transition to the time-saving gaming state is made, the time-saving state flag is turned off, and the start of change is set as the timing for changing the control of the main control board 920 for the right starting winning device 432. Although the timing immediately after the change has been described as an example, the change timing may be another timing, may be before the start of the change, or after a certain time has elapsed after the start of the change (for example, 0.5 seconds). (After). In this case, even if the start time prize occurs for the execution of the unit game before the fluctuation display of the number of times that has reached the upper limit number of games in the time reduction game state, the time reduction state flag is turned off. In this way, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the start winning of the second special symbol by winning the right starting winning device 432 is easily matched with the upper limit number of games.

  (56) In the above-described embodiment, a configuration has been described in which information that can be identified by the sense of the player is output using the device provided in the pachinko machine 100 as the operation notification control. In addition to the above, the left-handed information output, right-handed information output, and emission unnecessary information output are supported by an external output terminal capable of outputting information to a device such as a hall computer connected to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. A configuration in which separate information is externally output may be adopted.

  (57) In the above embodiment, a configuration in which three types of left-handed information output, right-handed information output, and firing-unnecessary information output are set as the operation notification has been described, but at least a part thereof is omitted. Alternatively, another information output type such as an information output corresponding to a game technique which may be a left-handed game or a right-handed game may be added.

  (58) The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, the pachinko machine may be configured to increase the expected value of a large hit until a large hit state occurs once (for example, two or three times) once the hit has occurred. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special game state on condition that a ball wins in a predetermined area after the big hit symbol is displayed. Further, the present invention may be applied to an enclosed pachinko machine in which balls circulate. Furthermore, other than a pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball type pachinko and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine, and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a game machine such as a parrot in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

<Invention extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing problems and effects as needed. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like. Further, the meanings and examples of the terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of the terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball flows through a predetermined entrance,
A game ball that flows down the game area has an entry portion (passage opening 621) into which the game ball can flow, and the game ball that flows down the game area is closer to the entrance of the game area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine; Or a distribution unit (roof 611B) for distributing to the second side that is farther from the entrance of the gaming area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
The game balls distributed to the second side by the distribution unit are arranged in a specific game area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution unit (from the left side to the downstream side with respect to the central structure 420). A first route (right downflow passage 653, downflow regulation unit 623) for guiding to the lower middle start winning device 431 including the lower middle start winning device 431);
A gaming machine comprising:

  In a typical game machine of the related art, a game ball fired in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entry. A configuration is known in which when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning opening.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, various ideas have been devised regarding the moving path of the game ball in order to improve the interest of the game by the game ball flowing down the game area. For example, there is a gaming machine that structurally changes a moving path of a game ball by providing a distribution unit for distributing the game ball to the left and right above a central structure disposed in the center of the game board (for example, JP 2004-254955 A).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in order to enhance the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, although the moving path of the game ball is diversified, the behavior of the game ball distributed by the distribution unit moves downstream, such as the game ball distributed to the right flows down the right side as it is. This also affects the position of the game ball flowing down. For this reason, the flow start position of the game ball aimed at by the player becomes uniform, and the firing operation of the player is likely to be limited so that a large number of game balls flow down on one side where the benefits related to the game are easily given, It lacked surprisingness.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 10, the gaming balls structurally distributed by the distribution unit can be moved on a moving route suitable for improving the interest of the game. That is, the game ball distributed to the side (second side) far from the entrance of the game area by the distribution unit can be moved to the side (first side) near the entrance of the game area, and The target position is diversified by the shooting operation, and it is possible to have unexpectedness. Also, even if the player performs a shooting operation so that a large number of game balls flow down to the second side, the game balls can be returned to the first side, so that the player can enter the approach section from the first side. In addition to aiming at the game area, even if a large number of game balls are caused to flow down from the second side to the approaching section, a game privilege in a specific game area can be provided. This makes it possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  The “first side” and the “second side” in the feature 10 change according to the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the gaming area is provided. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the exit of the firing passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, when the entrance of the game area is on the left side), the left side of the game area is on the “first side”. Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side in the game area corresponds to the “second side”.

  Similarly, the “specific game area” in the feature 10 also changes depending on the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, when the exit of the firing passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area as in the above-described embodiment, the “specific game area” is a game area from the left with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, the left game area). Area).

<Feature 11>
The gaming machine according to feature 10, wherein
A game, comprising: a second path (left downflow passage 652, downflow restriction section 623) for guiding a game ball distributed to the first side by the distribution section to the specific game area. Machine.

  In recent years, due to an increase in the size of the central structure, the size and arrangement of a region in which a game ball flows down in a game region tends to be limited. On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 11, both the gaming ball distributed to the first side and the gaming ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit have a common game area (distribution). The game can be guided to a specific game area formed on the first side with respect to the section, so that the limited game area can be effectively used.

<Feature 12>
A gaming machine according to feature 10 or 11, wherein
On the downstream side of the specific game area, there is provided a first advantageous area (lower middle starting winning device 431) which is an area for giving a more advantageous privilege when passing than when not passing. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 12, even if the gaming ball is distributed to the second side by the distribution unit, the gaming ball is transferred to a different side (the second side) with respect to the distribution unit. In the game area (specific game area) formed on the (1st side), it becomes possible to pass through the first advantageous area arranged on the downstream side of the specific game area. Accordingly, the player may pass through the first advantageous region to a game ball distributed to a side different from the side where the first advantageous region is provided by the distribution unit. You can expect to have none. Thereby, the interest of the game can be more appropriately improved.

  Note that the “benefit that is more advantageous when passing than when not passing” in the feature 12 is, for example, the right of various lotteries given based on passing, the provision of game value such as prize balls, and the like. . The right of various lotteries given based on passing is, for example, the right of the first special symbol lottery given based on passing (entering) the lower middle starting winning device 431.

<Feature 13>
The gaming machine according to feature 12, wherein
The distributing section is a second advantageous area (upper side) which is an area through which the game ball entered by the approaching section can pass, and which is an area for giving an advantageous privilege when passing the game ball compared to the case where the game ball does not pass. Medium start winning device 632).
The first route guides the game ball to the specific game area when the game ball is distributed to the second side by the distribution unit without entering the entrance. Gaming machine to do.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 13, when the game ball is fired from the second side so as to aim at the approach portion, the game ball does not enter the approach portion and passes through the second advantageous area. Even if the opportunity is lost, the distribution of the game ball to the second side by the distribution unit generates a possibility of passing to the first advantageous area. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the loss of the opportunity to enter the second advantageous area, and in this respect, it is also possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature 14>
The gaming machine according to feature 13,
A third game ball that has passed through the entry portion passes through the second side from the position of the second advantageous region without passing through the second advantageous region, and joins the first path. A gaming machine comprising a path (recess 622D, recess 622F).

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 14, even if the gaming ball does not pass through the second advantageous area even though the gaming ball has entered the approach portion, the gaming ball passes through the third route. To join the first path. Thereby, even if the player cannot pass the game ball to the second advantageous area, the player can expect that the game ball may pass through the first advantageous area.

  In particular, since the third route is a route that passes through the second side from the position of the second advantageous region and joins the first route, the player has unexpectedness with respect to the moving route of the game ball. On the other hand, it is possible to expect the game ball moving along the unexpected route that the game ball may pass through the first advantageous area. Thereby, the interest of the game can be more appropriately improved.

  In a typical game machine of the related art, when a game ball that has entered the entry section does not pass through an advantageous area such as the second advantageous area, the game ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. . On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the feature 14, even if the gaming ball that has entered the entry section does not pass through the second advantageous area, the gaming ball is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. Again, the chance of passing to the first advantageous area is provided again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the game ball that has entered the entry section not passing through the second advantageous area, and in this respect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Feature 15>
A gaming machine according to any of features 12 to 14,
The distribution unit is provided at a position at least partially overlapping the first advantageous region in the up-down direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine, wherein the first path is provided between the distribution unit and the first advantageous area.

  In the gaming machine according to Feature 15, the gaming ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit moves along the first route and is guided to a specific gaming area, and then enters the first advantageous area. The route leading to the route may be a route such as a substantially S-shape. Therefore, the player determines that the moving path until the game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit reaches the first advantageous area is completely different from the path that simply flows down. You can clearly recognize the travel route. Thus, even if the player fires a game ball aiming at a side away from a specific game area, the player fires while clearly grasping that the game ball may pass through the first advantageous area. Operations can be performed.

<Feature 16>
A gaming machine according to any of features 13 to 15,
Lottery means for selecting whether or not to generate the advantageous game state when a game ball passes at least one of the first advantageous area or the second advantageous area;
A gaming machine comprising: a display device for displaying identification information corresponding to a result of a lottery performed by the lottery means between the distribution unit and the first advantageous area in a game machine front view. .

  In the gaming machine according to the aspect 16, since the display device is provided between the distribution unit and the first advantageous area when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, the player can use the distribution unit to change the game ball to the second distribution area. If the game ball passes through the first advantageous region while following the movement path of the game ball when being distributed to the side, by raising the line of sight upward from the position of the first advantageous region, The identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery based on the game ball passing through the first advantageous area can be visually recognized. After checking the state of the display device, the player can raise the line of sight again to visually recognize the state in which the game balls are distributed in the distribution unit located above the display device. Can be suppressed from being distracted by the eyes.

<Feature 20>
A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball flows through a predetermined entrance,
A game ball is received, the game ball is received, the first side which is closer to the entrance of the gaming area in a front view of the gaming machine, or far from the entrance of the gaming area in a front view of the gaming machine, as viewed from the front of the gaming machine. A flow-down regulating unit (flow-down regulating unit 623) for moving to the second side, which is a side, and guiding to a specific game area (the left game area including the general winning device 639);
The specific game area includes an advantageous area (general prize winning device 639) for giving an advantageous privilege when passing, as compared to when not passing,
The flow-down regulating unit is configured so that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down regulating unit to the specific game area is different depending on a position where the game ball is received,
The gaming machine, wherein the advantageous region is provided at a position having a different possibility of passing in accordance with the position of the game ball received by the flow-down regulating unit.

  In a typical game machine of the related art, a game ball fired in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entry. A configuration is known in which when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning opening.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, various ideas have been devised regarding the moving path of the game ball in order to improve the interest of the game by the game ball flowing down the game area. For example, there is a gaming machine that structurally changes a moving path of a game ball by providing a distribution unit for distributing the game ball to the left and right above a central structure disposed in the center of the game board (for example, JP 2004-254955 A).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in order to enhance the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the moving path of the game ball is diversified, but the moving path is merely for changing the moving direction, and the game when the game ball is discharged from the moving path is changed. The behavior of the sphere was not considered. In addition, the entry of the game ball into the advantageous area is easily determined by the arrangement of a flow-down changing member such as a nail provided near the advantageous area, and the behavior of the game ball at a position away from the advantageous area affects the approach to the advantageous area. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to be interested only in the behavior of the game ball in a part of the game area.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 20, the flow-down regulating unit is configured to receive the game ball from the position where the game ball is received, on the side closer to the entrance of the game area (first side) or on the side farther from the entrance of the game area. (2nd side) to guide to a specific game area. The flow-down regulating unit is configured such that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down regulating unit to a specific game area is different depending on the position where the game ball is received. Then, in the specific game area, an advantageous area which gives a more advantageous privilege when passing than in the case where it does not pass is located at a position where the possibility of passage differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the downflow regulation unit Is provided. Thereby, the possibility that the player can receive an advantageous privilege can be changed according to the position of the game ball received by the flow-down regulating unit. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game in which the game ball is moved by the flow-down regulating section, so that the interest of the game can be appropriately improved.

  The “first side” and the “second side” in the feature 20 change according to the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the gaming area is provided. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the exit of the firing passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, when the entrance of the game area is on the left side), the left side of the game area is on the “first side”. Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side in the game area corresponds to the “second side”.

<Feature 21>
The gaming machine according to feature 20, wherein
The gaming machine, wherein the flow-down regulating portion is configured as an inclined portion that is inclined downward from one of the first side or the second side toward the other.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 21, the downflow restricting portion is configured as an inclined portion that is inclined from one side to the other, so that the potential energy of the game ball rolling the downflow restricting portion by its own weight is determined by the outlet. The higher the distance, the higher. Thereby, the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down regulating portion to the specific game area can be made different.

  In the feature 21, “a privilege that is more advantageous when the vehicle passes than when the vehicle does not pass” is exemplified by various lottery rights granted based on the vehicle being passed, the provision of game values such as prize balls, and the like. . The provision of a game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general prize device 639.

<Feature 22>
A gaming machine according to feature 20 or 21, wherein
A game ball that flows down the game area has an entry portion that can enter, and a game ball that flows down the game area is provided with a distribution unit that distributes the game ball to the first side or the second side,
The flow-down regulating unit is provided below the distribution unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and receives a game ball distributed to the first side or the second side by the distribution unit, and receives the game ball. To a specific game area.

  With the gaming machine described in the characteristic 22, the gaming balls distributed by the distribution unit can be discharged to a specific game area via the flow-down regulating unit.

<Feature 23>
The gaming machine according to feature 22, wherein
The flow-down regulating portion is configured as an inclined portion that is inclined downward from the second side toward the first side,
The specific game area is an area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution section (a left game area including the lower middle starting winning device 431 from the left side to the downstream side with respect to the central structure 420). And
The flow-down regulating unit receives the game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit on the second side from the center of the inclined portion, and receives the game ball to the first side by the distribution unit. A gaming machine, wherein the distributed gaming balls are received on the first side from the center of the inclined portion.

  According to the gaming machine described in the characteristic 23, even if the game ball is distributed to the side (second side) far from the entrance of the game area by the distribution unit, the game ball is distributed by the flow-down regulating unit. It is possible to obtain the possibility of passing to the advantageous area provided in the game area (specific game area) formed on the side (first side) closer to the entrance with respect to the branch. Therefore, since the player can diversify the target position by the firing operation, the interest of the game of distributing the game balls by the distribution unit can be appropriately improved.

  Further, depending on whether the game ball is distributed to the first side or the second side by the distribution unit, the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged to the specific game area from the flow-down regulating unit may be changed. it can. That is, depending on the position where the advantageous area is provided, there is a possibility that the player can obtain an advantageous privilege when the game ball is distributed to the first side and when the game ball is distributed to the second side. Can be changed. Also in this regard, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game in which the game ball is distributed by the distribution unit.

  The “specific game area” in the feature 23 changes according to the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, when the exit of the firing passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area as in the above-described embodiment, the “specific game area” is a game area from the left with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, the left game area). Area).

<Feature 24>
The gaming machine according to feature 23,
The advantageous region is such that, when the flow-down regulating unit receives a game ball distributed to the second side by the distribution unit, the flow-down regulation unit is distributed to the second side by the distribution unit. A gaming machine characterized by being provided at a position having a higher possibility of passing than when receiving a game ball.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 24, the player can increase the possibility of passing to the advantageous area by performing a firing operation aiming at a position where the player can be distributed to the second side by the distribution unit. Since it is possible, it is possible to improve interest in firing game balls aiming at a predetermined position.

<Feature 30>
A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball flows through a predetermined entrance,
A decoration part (decoration main parts 612A, 613A) that is configured to make the back side visible and to decorate by emitting light;
A game ball passage (left downflow passage 652, right downflow passage 653) formed on the back side of the decorative portion;
At least one passage display portion (protruding portion 612D, 613D) extending along the continuous direction of the game ball passage in the game ball passage;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In a typical game machine of the related art, a game ball fired in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entry. A configuration is known in which when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning opening.

  In such a conventional gaming machine, various ideas have been devised regarding the moving path of the game ball in order to improve the interest of the game by the game ball flowing down the game area. For example, a game in which a warp path for guiding game balls from the outside to the inside of a central structure disposed in the center of a game board is provided, and the game balls are guided to a stage that can be guided to a starting device using the warp path. Machine (for example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-254955).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in order to enhance the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, the warp path is provided inside or on the back side of the central structure, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the warp path from the front of the gaming machine. Therefore, when the game ball enters the warp route, the player loses sight of the game ball and cannot find the whereabouts. Therefore, the player may not be able to enjoy the game even at one time by feeling distrust that the game ball may not come out of the warp route or frustration that he cannot confirm the game ball.

  In order to solve such a problem, it is conceivable to make the central structure transparent so that the warp passage is visible. However, in recent years, gaming machines that decorate a central structure by emitting light from a light-emitting body provided therein have become mainstream. Therefore, even if the central structure is configured to be transparent, the player can easily lose the position of the warp path due to the light decorating the central structure, and accordingly, the game balls passing through the warp path can be easily lost. Challenges remain unresolved.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine 30, the passage display portion extending along the continuous direction of the gaming ball passage is provided in the gaming ball passage formed on the back side of the decoration portion. Even if the decoration is to be decorated by emitting light, the player can easily grasp the game ball path before starting the game. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the player from feeling distrust of the game ball that has entered the game ball passage, the player can enjoy the game started by causing the game ball to enter the game ball passage. . This makes it possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

<Feature 31>
The gaming machine according to feature 30, wherein
A plurality of the passage display units are arranged in a direction intersecting a continuous direction of the game ball passage.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 31, since the passage display section is provided in a plurality in a direction intersecting the continuous direction of the game ball passage, the player can use the plurality of passage display sections to play the game ball. It is easier to grasp the passage.

<Feature 32>
A gaming machine according to feature 30 or 31, wherein
The decorative part includes a decorative undulating surface formed on the front side of the decorative part and a streaky protrusion formed on the back side of the decorative part and extending along the continuous direction of the game ball passage (protruding part 612D, 613D).
The gaming machine, wherein the passage display section is constituted by the streak-like projection.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 32, the decorative undulating surface formed on the front side of the decorative portion provides a high degree of decorativeness, and the projection formed on the back side improves the visibility of the game ball passage. Can be secured. That is, it is possible to achieve both decorativeness and good visibility of the game ball passage.

<Feature 33>
The gaming machine according to feature 32,
The gaming ball passage is configured to include a back surface of the decorative portion and a passage surface facing the back surface, and is a passage that extends vertically in a game machine front view,
A gaming machine, wherein the passage surface is provided with a concave portion corresponding to the projecting portion at a position where the streak-like projecting portion is formed.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 33, the path formed between the protrusion and the recess allows the passage path of the game ball path to be configured not as a vertical drop but as a path meandering along the recess. In such a meandering portion, the speed of the game ball passing through the game ball passage can be reduced.

<Feature 34>
The gaming machine according to feature 33,
A gaming machine, wherein the streak-like projection is formed so that a height from an installation surface of the decoration part gradually increases inward from an end of the projection.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 34, the meandering portion formed by the projections and the concave portions in the game ball passage can be moderated, so that the game ball passes through the passage by meandering the game ball passage. Clogging can be suppressed.

<Feature 35>
A gaming machine according to feature 33 or 34,
A gaming machine, wherein a length of a section defined by the projection and extending in a continuous direction of the game ball passage in a direction intersecting the continuous direction is smaller than a width of the game ball.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 35, since the length of each section defined by the projection and extending in the continuous direction of the game ball passage in the direction intersecting the continuous direction is smaller than the width of the game ball, The game ball can be passed along each section extending in the continuous direction of the game ball passage. As a result, the game balls passing through the game ball passage are rectified, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls from being clogged in the passage.

<Feature 36>
A gaming machine according to any of features 30 to 35,
A game ball that flows down the game area has an entry portion (passage opening 621) into which the game ball can flow, and the game ball that flows down the game area is closer to the entrance of the game area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine; Or a sorting unit (roof 611B) for sorting to the second side that is far from the entrance of the game area,
The gaming machine, wherein the game ball passage is a passage of the game ball distributed by the distribution unit.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 36, the gaming balls distributed by the distribution unit can enter the gaming ball path. The player can grasp the whereabouts of the game balls after being sorted by the sorting unit by using the passage display unit.

  The “first side” and the “second side” in the feature 36 change according to the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the gaming area is provided. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the exit of the firing passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, when the entrance of the game area is on the left side), the left side of the game area is on the “first side”. Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side in the game area corresponds to the “second side”.

<Feature 37>
A gaming machine according to feature 36,
The distributing portion is provided on the downstream side of the game ball passage through which the game balls distributed to the second side pass, and the game balls are transferred from the second side to the first side in a game machine front view. By moving toward the specific game area (including the lower middle starting winning device 431 on the downstream side from the left side with respect to the central structure 420 to the specific game area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution section A gaming machine comprising a flow-down regulating section (flow-down regulating section 623) for guiding to a left-side gaming area).

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the gaming machine 37, the gaming ball distributed to the side (the second side) far from the entrance of the gaming area by the distribution unit passes through the gaming ball passage and the flow-down regulating section, and then is distributed to the gaming area. The user is guided to a specific game area formed on the side (first side) near the entrance. In such a case, after the game balls are sorted by the sorting unit, the game balls pass through a relatively long route before entering a specific game area, but due to the presence of the passage display unit, the player As described above, it is easy to grasp the game ball passage before the start of the game (that is, before the game ball enters a specific game area). Thereby, it is possible to preferably suppress the player from feeling untrustworthy or the like with respect to a game ball that has entered a relatively long route including a game ball passage until reaching a specific game area.

  The “specific game area” in the feature 37 changes according to the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, when the exit of the firing passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area as in the above-described embodiment, the “specific game area” is a game area from the left with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, the left game area). Area).

<Feature 38>
A gaming machine according to feature 37,
The flow-down regulating portion is configured as an inclined portion that is inclined downward from the second side toward the first side, receives a game ball passing through the game ball passage, and receives the game ball. To move to the first side to guide to the specific game area,
The specific game area includes an advantageous area (lower middle starting prize device 431) that gives a more advantageous privilege when passing than when not passing,
The flow-down regulating unit is configured such that an acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down regulating unit is different depending on a position where the game ball is received,
The gaming machine, wherein the advantageous region is provided at a position having a different possibility of passing in accordance with the position of the game ball received by the flow-down regulating unit.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 38, the downflow regulation unit receives the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage, and receives the game ball from the position where the game ball is received, from the side closer to the entrance of the game area (the first side). ) To guide to a specific game area. The flow-down regulating unit is configured such that the acceleration mode of the game ball discharged from the flow-down regulating unit to a specific game area is different depending on the position where the game ball is received. Then, in the specific game area, an advantageous area which gives a more advantageous privilege when passing than in the case where it does not pass is located at a position where the possibility of passage differs depending on the position of the game ball received by the downflow regulation unit Is provided. As described above, the probability that a player can receive an advantageous privilege changes according to the position of the flow-down regulation unit that has received the game ball when the game ball has passed through the game ball passage. In addition, it is possible to enjoy a game in which the game ball that has passed through the game ball passage is moved by the flow-down regulating unit, and thereby the interest of the game can be appropriately improved.

  Note that the “benefit that is more advantageous when passing than when not passing” in the feature 38 is, for example, the right of various lotteries given based on passing, the provision of a game value such as prize balls, and the like. . The provision of a game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general prize device 639.

<Feature 40>
The game balls are distributed to a plurality of discharge locations (recesses 625A to 625C) including at least a location where a first area (lower middle starting winning device 431) to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing through is located on the downstream side. A possible first distribution unit (stage 625);
A plurality of discharge locations (recesses 622D to 622D) including at least a location where a second area (upper middle start winning device 632) different from the first area is provided on the downstream side where a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing through. 622F), a second allocating unit (stage 622C) that can distribute the game ball to the first allocating unit and is provided at a different position from the first allocating unit.
With
A gaming machine, wherein the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit have rolling surfaces configured to have similar shapes with respect to the rolling behavior of game balls.

  In a typical game machine of the related art, a game ball fired in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entry. A configuration is known in which when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning opening.

  Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with two starting ports to improve the interest of the game. Among such gaming machines, there are also gaming machines that use the sorting by stage to change the probability of entering one of the two starting openings to further enhance the interest. (See, for example, JP-A-2015-173875).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in order to enhance the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, although the probability of entering the ball with respect to one of the two starting ports can be changed by the distribution by the stage, the distribution contributes to the probability of entering the ball with the other starting port. It does not do. For this reason, the player cannot enjoy the game characteristics of distribution by stage for starting ports other than the specific starting port.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 40, the first game ball can be distributed to the first area, which is one of the areas to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing the game machine. A distributing unit is provided, and a second distributing unit capable of distributing a game ball toward a second region, which is another region to which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing, is provided. Have. Therefore, the player can enjoy the playability of the distribution by the first distribution unit or the second distribution unit for both the first region and the second region. This makes it possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  Further, since the first distributing unit and the second distributing unit have rolling surfaces configured to have similar shapes with respect to the rolling behavior of the game ball, the rolling of the game ball on the rolling surface is performed. The dynamic behavior is similar in both distribution sections. Therefore, the player can visually enjoy the distribution of the game balls by the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit in a similar manner.

  The “predetermined privilege in the game” in the feature 40 is exemplified by the right of various lotteries given based on passing, the addition of a game value such as a prize ball, and the like. The provision of a game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general prize device 639.

<Feature 41>
The gaming machine according to feature 40,
First display means (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying a symbol which is displayed in a variable manner and displays a lottery result;
A first path (left warp passage 628) from a side of the first display means to the first distribution unit;
With
Each rolling surface of the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit includes a surface formed substantially in the left-right direction in a game machine front view, which is a combination of a concave surface and a convex surface,
The first distribution unit is provided below the first display unit in a game machine front view,
The gaming machine, wherein the second distribution unit is provided above the first display means in a game machine front view.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 41, the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit include a combination of a concave surface and a convex surface, the surface including a surface formed substantially symmetrically in the left-right direction in a front view of the gaming machine. Since it has a moving surface, the shape of these distribution parts extends in the left-right direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. In a typical gaming machine, the first display means is configured such that the length in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine is longer than the length in the up-down direction, and is provided near the center of the gaming area. By providing the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit having a shape extending in the upper and lower directions via the first display means, a game area for flowing a game ball in the left and right direction of the first display means is preferable. The size can be secured.

  At this time, since the first path from the side of the first display means to the first distribution unit is provided, the game sphere flowing down the game area provided in the left-right direction with respect to the first display means is provided. Through one path, it can be guided to the first distribution unit provided below the first display means. Therefore, the game area around the first display means can be effectively used.

<Feature 42>
A gaming machine according to feature 41,
When the game ball discharged from any of the plurality of discharge locations in the second distribution unit does not pass through the second area, a second route capable of guiding the game ball to the first distribution unit A gaming machine comprising a (flow-down regulating portion 623, left-side game area).

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 42, even if the game ball discharged from any of the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit does not pass through the second area, the game ball is transferred to the second area. Since the second route that can be guided to the one distribution unit is provided, the player has another chance to obtain a predetermined privilege. Therefore, even if the predetermined privilege cannot be obtained as a result of the distribution by the second distribution unit, the disappointment of the player due to the predetermined privilege is reduced, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

  In addition, when the game ball distributed by the second distribution unit is guided to the first distribution unit through the second route, the player in the first distribution unit performs the same operation as the second distribution unit. You will see how the game balls are sorted by the rolling behavior of. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to make the player feel that the chance of obtaining the predetermined privilege has been obtained again, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that the “second route” in the feature 42 may include the “first route” or may not include the “first route”.

<Feature 43>
A gaming machine according to feature 42,
A game area where a game ball flows down through a predetermined entrance,
A game ball that flows down the game area has an entry portion into which the game ball can flow, and a game ball that flows down the game area, a first side that is closer to the entrance of the game area in a front view of the gaming machine, or A third distribution unit (roof 611B) that distributes the game area to a second side that is farther from the entrance of the gaming area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine;
A third route (flow-down regulating unit) that guides the game balls distributed to the second side by the third distribution unit to a specific game area formed on the first side with respect to the distribution unit. 623),
With
The second distribution unit is for distributing a game ball entered from the entry unit,
When the game ball discharged from any of the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit does not pass through the second area, the game ball joins the third path,
The gaming machine, wherein the second path includes the third path that passes after the merging.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 43, although the gaming ball has entered the approaching section, the gaming ball has not passed through the second area as a result of the distribution by the second distribution section. Also, by joining the third route, the player is given another chance to obtain a predetermined privilege. Thereby, even if the predetermined privilege cannot be obtained as a result of the distribution by the second distribution unit, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to that.

  In addition, some conventional gaming machines structurally change the movement path of the game ball by providing a distribution portion for distributing the game ball to the left and right above a central structure disposed in the center of the game board. (For example, refer to JP-A-2004-254955). However, in the conventional gaming machine, although the movement path of the game ball is diversified, the behavior of the game ball distributed by the distribution unit is downstream, such that the game ball distributed to the right flows down the right side as it is. This also affects the position of the game ball flowing down. For this reason, the flow start position of the game ball aimed at by the player becomes uniform, and the firing operation of the player is likely to be limited so that a large number of game balls flow down on one side where the benefits related to the game are easily given, It lacked surprisingness.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 43, by providing the third route, the gaming balls structurally distributed by the third distribution unit can be moved on a moving route suitable for improving the interest of the game. Can be moved. That is, the game ball distributed to the side (second side) far from the entrance of the game area by the third distribution unit can be moved to the side (first side) near the entrance of the game area, The position that the player aims at is diversified by the firing operation, and it is possible to give a surprising effect. Also, even if the player performs a shooting operation so that a large number of game balls flow down to the second side, the game balls can be returned to the first side, so that the player can enter the approach section from the first side. In addition to aiming at the game area, even if a large number of game balls are caused to flow down from the second side to the approaching section, a game privilege in a specific game area can be provided. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  The “first side” and “second side” in the feature 43 change according to the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the gaming area is provided. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, when the exit of the firing passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area (that is, when the entrance of the game area is on the left side), the left side of the game area is on the “first side”. Equivalent to. In such a case, the right side in the game area corresponds to the “second side”.

  Similarly, the “specific game area” in the feature 43 also changes depending on the side of the gaming machine where the entrance of the game area is provided. For example, when the exit of the firing passage 401B is located on the left side of the game area as in the above-described embodiment, the “specific game area” is a game area from the left with respect to the central structure 420 (that is, the left game area). Area).

<Feature 45>
A gaming machine according to any of features 40 to 44,
The first distribution unit and the second distribution unit include a surface formed by a combination of a concave surface and a convex surface as the rolling surface,
The plurality of discharge locations in the first distribution unit and the plurality of discharge locations in the second distribution unit are provided at positions corresponding to each other on the rolling surface,
A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the plurality of discharge locations in the first distribution section has a different discharge direction from a corresponding discharge location in the second distribution section.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 45, the rolling behavior of the game ball on the rolling surface is similar between the first distribution unit and the second distribution unit, but at least one corresponding discharge. Since the discharge direction is different at each location, it is possible for the player to intuitively distinguish the difference between the distribution units according to the difference in the discharge direction. Thereby, the monotonousness of the game which may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the first distributing unit and the second distributing unit can be avoided.

<Feature 46>
A gaming machine according to any of features 40 to 45,
The first distribution unit and the second distribution unit include two concave surfaces and a convex surface located between the concave surfaces as the rolling surface,
The first area is an area fixedly provided at a position through which game balls discharged from one or more specific discharge points among the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit can pass. ,
The second area is an area provided so as to be movable within a range in which game balls respectively discharged from one or more specific discharge points among the plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit can pass. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  In the gaming machine according to the characteristic 46, the second area is provided so as to be movable within a range in which game balls respectively discharged from a specific discharge point among a plurality of discharge points in the second distribution unit can pass. The probability that a game ball discharged from a specific discharge location passes through the second area is fixed at a position where the game ball discharged from the specific discharge location can pass. It is lower than the case where Therefore, a sense of expectation for passing through the first area or the second area can be made different between when the game ball enters the first distribution section and when it enters the second distribution section. Thereby, the monotonousness of the game which may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the first distributing unit and the second distributing unit can be avoided.

<Feature 47>
A gaming machine according to any of features 40 to 46,
The benefit given by passing the game ball through the second area and the benefit given by passing the game ball through the first area are different from each other in the value expected from each benefit. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 47, the expectation of the value can be made different between a case where the game ball passes through the first area and a case where the game ball passes through the second area. It is possible to avoid the monotony of the game that may be felt due to the similar rolling behavior of the game ball between the distribution unit and the second distribution unit.

<Feature 50>
First display means (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying a symbol which is displayed in a variable manner and displays a lottery result;
A symbol moving means (sub-control board 940) for moving a symbol displayed on the screen in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied;
A first area (lower middle starting winning device 431) in which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing through,
A second area (an upper middle start-up area) which is different from the first area and has a lower possibility of passing than the first area, in which a predetermined privilege in a game is given by passing through Winning device 632),
With
The operating condition is satisfied based on the possibility that a game ball can pass to the second area,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined direction according to the operating condition is a direction indicating the side of the second area.

  In a typical game machine of the related art, a game ball fired in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entry. A configuration is known in which when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set and a large number of game balls can be won in the winning opening. Some of such conventional gaming machines are provided with two starting ports to improve the interest of the game (see, for example, JP-A-2015-173875).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in order to enhance the interest of the game. That is, in a typical game machine of the related art, since two starting ports are provided vertically above and below each other, a player's line of sight pursuing the flow-down behavior of the game ball while wishing to enter the starting port. Is limited to a relatively narrow range, and the player may feel monotonous in the game. In order to solve such a problem, it is conceivable to provide two starting ports at positions separated from each other. However, since a notable portion is separated, the player's consciousness tends to be biased toward one starting port, so that the player is There is a possibility of missing a ball entering the other starting port. Entry into the starting opening is an event that triggers a lottery, and is one of the events that interests the player. Therefore, the player loses one opportunity to gain interest by missing the ball in the starting opening.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 50, when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility that the game ball can pass to the second area, the game is displayed on the screen of the first display means. Is moved in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition. Therefore, the player can recognize from the movement of the symbol and the moving direction thereof that the predetermined operating condition, that is, the possibility that the game ball can pass to the second area has occurred. This makes it difficult for the player to overlook the passage of the game ball in the second area, and can appropriately obtain the interest caused by the game ball passing through the second area.

  In particular, since the symbol displayed in a fluctuating manner and displaying the lottery result is one of the places where the player is most likely to be conscious, the player can catch the movement of the symbol with a high probability. Therefore, by moving such a symbol, it is possible for the player to appropriately recognize that the possibility of the passing of the game ball to the second area has occurred. In addition, since the moving direction of the symbol due to the possibility of the passing of the game ball to the second area is the direction indicating the side of the second area, the player moves his / her eyes in accordance with the movement of the symbol. Thus, the user's line of sight can be naturally directed to the second region. Therefore, the player can witness the passage of the game ball in the second area with a suitable probability.

  Here, since the second area has a lower possibility of passing than the first area, the expectation of the player to pass is higher than the first area. Further, the second area having a lower possibility of passing than the first area is an area where the player is more likely to take his / her eyes than the first area. On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 50, the player can witness the passing of the game ball in the second area with a suitable probability, so that the player can be provided with a more suitable interest.

  Note that the “predetermined privilege in the game” in the feature 50 is exemplified by various lottery rights given based on passing the game, the provision of game values such as prize balls, and the like. The provision of a game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general prize device 639.

<Feature 51>
A gaming machine according to the gaming machine 50,
The first area is provided below the first display means in a game machine front view,
The game machine, wherein the second area is provided above the first display means in a game machine front view.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 51, since the first display means is interposed between the first area and the second area, the player's consciousness of the second area having a low possibility of passing is easily weakened. The passing of the game ball in the two areas is also more easily overlooked. However, even in such a second area, the occurrence of the possibility of the passing of the game ball is suggested by the movement of the symbol that the player is most likely to be conscious to in the direction indicating the side of the second area. The player can witness the passing of the game ball in the second area with a suitable probability.

<Feature 52>
A gaming machine according to feature 50 or 51,
A lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery as the predetermined privilege when the game ball passes through the first area;
The gaming machine, wherein the symbol is for displaying a lottery result by the lottery means.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 52, the possibility of passing the game ball to the second area is generated by using a symbol for displaying a result of the lottery performed by the game ball passing the first area. Is suggested. Therefore, providing the player with the expectation of passing the game ball to the second area at the same time as the expectation of the result of the lottery performed by the game ball passing through the first area having no relation to the second area. Can be.

<Feature 53>
A gaming machine according to any of features 50 to 52,
The value that can be expected from the privilege given when the game ball passes through the second area is higher than the value that can be expected from the benefit given when the game ball passes through the first area. A gaming machine characterized by:

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 53, the passing of the game ball to the second area, which can be expected to have a higher value than the first area, is more likely to be witnessed by the player. Can be provided.

<Feature 54>
A gaming machine according to any of features 50 to 53,
A gaming machine comprising a symbol reduction means (sub-control board 940) for reducing a symbol displayed on the screen when the operating condition is satisfied.

  In the case of the gaming machine 54, the symbol is reduced when the predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility that the game ball can pass to the second area, so that after the symbol is moved, the symbol on the screen is displayed. The non-display area is formed with a certain size. Therefore, using the non-display area, the second area can be moved by another method of moving the symbol (for example, moving the movable body on the non-display area or displaying a character different from the symbol). It is possible to indicate to the player that the possibility of the passing of the game ball to the player has occurred.

<Feature 55>
A gaming machine according to any of features 50 to 54,
A movable body (movable body 710) movable in a predetermined direction within a range including at least a position overlapping the screen of the first display means;
Movable body moving means (sub-control board 940) for moving the movable body in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means when the operating condition is satisfied;
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 55, when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied due to the possibility that the game ball can pass to the second area, the movable body is moved in a predetermined direction according to the operating condition (ie, , A direction indicating the side of the second area), the player can determine the position of the second area and the possibility of passing a game ball to the second area based on the movement of the movable body and the direction of the movement. Can be recognized. Particularly, since the movable body is moved at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means, the player can visually recognize the movement of the movable body at the same time as visually confirming the movement of the symbol. It is possible to more suitably recognize that the possibility of passing has occurred.

<Feature 56>
A gaming machine according to any of features 50 to 55,
A second distribution unit (stage 622C) for distributing game balls to a plurality of discharge locations including at least a location where the second area is located downstream;
Detecting means (contact sensor 662) for detecting a game ball entering the second distribution unit;
With
A game machine characterized in that when a game ball entering the second distribution section is detected by the detection means, there is a possibility that the game ball can pass into the second area.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 56, when the detecting means detects a game ball entering the second distribution section, the movable body is moved as a possibility that the game ball can pass to the second area is generated. This allows the player to pay attention to the distribution of the game balls by the second distribution unit. This allows the player to enjoy the game of distributing the game balls by the second distribution unit.

<Feature 57>
A gaming machine according to any of features 50 to 56,
The screen of the first display means can display a character,
A game machine comprising a character display means (sub-control board 940) for displaying a character indicating a predetermined direction according to the operating condition when the operating condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 57, when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied due to the possibility that the game ball can pass to the second area, a predetermined direction corresponding to the operation condition (ie, the second direction) (A direction indicating the side of the area) is displayed, so that the player can generate the position of the second area and the possibility of passing the game ball to the second area based on the displayed character. Can recognize.

<Feature 60>
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a second predetermined condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied;
A movable body (movable body 710) movable in a predetermined direction;
A second light-emitting unit disposed on the front side of the gaming machine in the movable body and capable of displaying a variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means by emitting light in a predetermined mode in response to establishment of the second predetermined condition; Display means (decorative design display device 779);
The movable body is located at a predetermined initial position and moves to one side in the predetermined direction from the initial position when the possibility of satisfaction of the second predetermined condition occurs, and the second predetermined condition is satisfied. Wherein the variable display is executed by the second display means in accordance with the first position, the variable position is located at a variable display position separated from the initial position to one side in the predetermined direction.

  In a typical game machine of the related art, a game ball fired in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entry. Then, a configuration is known in which when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set, and a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2015-173875).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in order to enhance the interest of the game. That is, in a conventional typical gaming machine, the player's consciousness tends to face a display device that displays a variable display or a lottery result, so that the player may miss a ball entering the starting port. Was. Entry into the starting opening is an event that triggers a lottery, and is one of the events that interests the player. Therefore, the player loses one opportunity to gain interest by missing the ball in the starting opening.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 60, the movable body is moved in a predetermined direction when the possibility of establishment of the second predetermined condition that is a trigger of the lottery by the lottery means occurs. Can recognize from the moving direction of the movable body (that is, the predetermined direction) that the second predetermined condition can be satisfied. This makes it difficult for the player to overlook the establishment of the second predetermined condition that triggers the lottery by the lottery means, and can appropriately obtain the interest of the game in which the lottery is performed by the establishment of the second predetermined condition. In particular, the moving direction of the movable body when the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied occurs is a direction in which the movable body moves from the initial position to the variable display position. It can be intuitively recognized that the condition is related to establishment of the condition.

  Further, since the movable body provided with the second display means is diverted as a component indicating that the possibility of satisfaction of the second predetermined condition has occurred, it is determined that the possibility of satisfaction of the second predetermined condition has occurred. There is no need to provide a dedicated part for indicating, and an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  In the feature 60, the "second predetermined condition" and "second display means" may be "predetermined condition" and "display means", respectively.

<Feature 61>
The gaming machine according to feature 60,
The gaming machine, wherein the movable body is located at an intermediate position closer to the initial position than the variable display position when the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied is generated.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 61, when the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied occurs, the movable body is located at an intermediate position between the initial position and the variable display position. In accordance with the above, it is possible to cause the player to distinguish whether the movement of the movable body has been performed due to the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied or performed to perform the variable display by the second display means. it can. Thereby, the player can appropriately recognize that the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied has occurred.

<Feature 62>
A gaming machine according to feature 60 or 61,
A second area (upper middle starting winning device 632) where the second predetermined condition is satisfied by the passing of the game ball;
The gaming machine, wherein the second area is provided on one side of the movable body in the predetermined direction.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 62, since the moving direction of the movable body is on the side of the area (second area) related to the establishment of the second predetermined condition, the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied occurs. In this case, the player's line of sight can be naturally directed to the second area in accordance with the movement of the movable body. Thereby, the player can witness the passing of the game ball in the second area where the second predetermined condition is satisfied with a suitable probability.

<Feature 63>
A gaming machine according to any of features 60 to 62,
The lottery means performs a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition is satisfied,
A first display means (decorative symbol display device 479) having a screen capable of displaying a symbol displaying a result of the lottery performed by the lottery means performed based on the establishment of the first predetermined condition;
The gaming machine, wherein the movable body is configured to be movable in a vertical direction in a front view of the gaming machine, and overlaps the screen at least when the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied is generated.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 63, the movable body moves at a position overlapping with the screen of the first display means at least when the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied is generated. The screen of the first display means is a part on which a symbol displaying a lottery result based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition is displayed, and is one of the parts where the player is most likely to be conscious. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the movable body that moves at a position overlapping the screen of the first display means, and thereby can appropriately recognize that the possibility that the second predetermined condition is satisfied has occurred.

<Feature 64>
A gaming machine according to any of features 60 to 63,
A second area (upper middle starting winning device 632) where the second predetermined condition is satisfied by the passing of the game ball;
A second distribution unit (stage 622C) for distributing game balls to a plurality of discharge locations including at least a location where the second area is located downstream;
Detecting means (contact sensor 662) for detecting a game ball entering the second distribution unit;
With
A game machine characterized in that when a game ball entering the second distribution section is detected by the detection means, there is a possibility that the game ball can pass into the second area.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 64, when the detection means detects a game ball entering the second distribution unit, the movable body is moved assuming that the possibility of establishment of the second predetermined condition is generated. The distribution of the game balls by the second distribution unit can be noticed by the player. This allows the player to enjoy the game of distributing the game balls by the second distribution unit.

<Feature 65>
A gaming machine according to any of features 60 to 64,
A first area (lower middle starting winning device 431) in which a first predetermined condition is satisfied by passing a game ball;
A first distribution unit (stage 625) provided within the movable range of the movable body and capable of distributing game balls to a plurality of discharge locations including at least a location where the first region is located downstream;
With
The movable body is located between the initial position and the variable display position when a game ball is distributed by the first distribution unit, and the second display unit is configured to display the first distribution unit Located at the irradiation position, which is a position where the rolling surface of the game ball can be illuminated,
In the second display means, at least a part of the light emitting unit is disposed in a shape along the rolling surface of the first distribution unit,
The gaming machine, wherein the second display means emits light when the movable body is located at the irradiation position irrespective of establishment of the second predetermined condition.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 65, when the game balls are sorted by the first sorting unit, the second display means of the movable body located at the irradiation position is irrespective of establishment of the second predetermined condition. Emits light. The irradiation position is a position between the initial position and the variable display position, and is a position where the second display means can illuminate the rolling surface of the game ball in the first distribution unit. Therefore, the game ball to be distributed by the first distribution unit rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the second display means. In particular, since the second display means has at least a part of the light emitting portion disposed in a shape along the rolling surface of the first distribution portion, the rolling surface of the first distribution portion can be efficiently arranged. Can be illuminated.

  Here, since the distribution of the game balls by the first distribution unit is related to the establishment of the first predetermined condition, the player pays attention to the distribution of the game balls by the first distribution unit while expecting the establishment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, when the game ball rolls on the rolling surface illuminated by the second display means, the light illuminating the rolling surface functions as an effect that expects the player to satisfy the first predetermined condition. As a result, the player's sense of expectation is raised, and the interest of the game in which the first distribution unit distributes the game balls can be appropriately improved.

  In the gaming machine according to feature 65, the second display means emits light in a mode different from a predetermined mode in which the second body emits light in response to establishment of the second predetermined condition when the movable body is located at the irradiation position. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an event that makes the player mistakenly assuming that the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

<Feature 70>
When the second predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery according to the satisfied condition;
A movable body (movable body 710) movable in a predetermined direction;
A second light-emitting unit disposed on the front side of the gaming machine in the movable body and capable of displaying a variable display and a lottery result by the lottery means by emitting light in a predetermined mode in response to establishment of the second predetermined condition; Display means (decorative design display device 779);
With
The movable body is located at a predetermined initial position, and when performing the variable display by the second display means in response to establishment of the second predetermined condition, the movable body is positioned at a variable display position different from the initial position. ,
The second display unit includes a result display unit (character 779B) for notifying that a lottery result by the lottery unit is a predetermined result (big hit).
When the movable body is located at a position different from the variable display position, a display change unit that visually recognizes a content corresponding to a predetermined result indicated by the result display unit as a content different from the content corresponding to the result. A gaming machine having an entrance 626 and an outlet 627).

  In a typical game machine of the related art, a game ball fired in response to a player's operation enters a game area formed on a game board and flows down the game area. When a game ball flowing down the game area enters the starting port, a lottery is performed in accordance with the entry. Then, a configuration is known in which when a big hit is won in the lottery, a special game state is set, and a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2015-173875).

  However, in conventional gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in order to enhance the interest of the game. That is, in the conventional gaming machines, the variable display and the lottery result are generally displayed on the screen of the display device, and in that respect, there is a limit to the amusement that can be given to the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 70, the variable display based on the satisfaction of the second predetermined condition and the lottery result are displayed using the second display means provided on the movable body movable in the predetermined direction. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a higher level of interest than a conventional general gaming machine. In the gaming machine according to the feature 70, when the movable body is located at a position different from the variable display position, the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the result display unit of the second display unit is the content corresponding to the predetermined result. The content is visually recognized as a content different from the content corresponding to the result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the predetermined result has been obtained even when the second display unit is not in a state of displaying the lottery result based on the establishment of the second predetermined condition. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being meaninglessly discouraged by erroneously recognizing the lottery result, so that it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being reduced due to such erroneous recognition.

  In the feature 70, the "second predetermined condition" and the "second display means" may be the "predetermined condition" and the "display means", respectively.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine according to feature 70,
The result display unit includes information corresponding to the predetermined result fixedly provided on a surface,
The display change means is constituted as a window (entrance 626, discharge port 627) of a predetermined shape located on the front side of the gaming machine with respect to the second display means, and the movable body is displayed in the variable display from the initial position. When the camera is located at a predetermined position in the range up to the position, at least a part of the result display unit is visually recognized through the window to correspond to the predetermined result indicated by the information formed on the result display unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the content to be played is visually recognized as a content different from the content corresponding to the predetermined result.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 71, at least a part of the result display unit is visually recognized by a player through a window having a predetermined shape, so that information fixedly formed on the surface of the result display unit is displayed. The content shown (that is, the content corresponding to the predetermined result) can be visually recognized as a content different from the content corresponding to the predetermined result. Therefore, erroneous recognition of the predetermined result indicated by the result display unit of the second display unit can be realized with a relatively simple configuration without controllably changing the information of the result display unit.

  In addition, in the feature 71, "fixedly provided on the surface" may mean that the surface is flatly attached by printing or the like, or that the surface is formed by undulation on the surface. Good.

<Feature 72>
The gaming machine according to feature 71,
The window is an opening on the front side of the gaming machine connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction in the gaming machine front view,
The display change unit allows at least a part of the result display unit to be visually recognized from the near side of the opening when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, thereby visually recognizing the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the result display unit as different content. A gaming machine characterized by the following.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to Feature 72, the window portion is an opening on the front side of the gaming machine connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, so that the opening on the front side of the gaming machine in the passage of the gaming ball is provided. Can be used as a window. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a window functioning as a display changing unit exclusively, so that an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed. Also, by allowing at least a part of the result display section to be visually recognized at a position facing the opening of the passage of the game ball, the player can pay attention to the passage.

<Feature 73>
The gaming machine according to feature 72,
A first area (lower middle starting winning device 431) in which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing through,
An entrance (entrance 626) which is opened on the front side of the gaming machine and connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction when the gaming machine is viewed from the front;
A discharge unit (discharge port 627) connected to the passage and discharging a game ball guided from the entrance unit through the passage to an upstream side of the first area;
A first distribution unit (stage 625) for distributing a game ball to the entrance or the outside of the entrance;
With
The gaming machine, wherein the window is the entrance.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 73, the window portion is an entry portion where the gaming balls distributed by the first distribution portion enter. Since the game ball that has entered the entry portion is discharged from the discharge portion to the upstream side of the first region, at least a part of the result display portion is visually recognized at a point where the entrance is facing from the front side of the gaming machine, It is possible to make the player pay attention to the superiority of a game ball entering the entry section.

  The “predetermined privilege in the game” in the feature 73 is exemplified by various lottery rights given based on the passing of the game, the provision of game values such as prize balls, and the like. The provision of a game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general prize device 639.

<Feature 74>
The gaming machine according to feature 72,
A first area (lower middle starting winning device 431) in which a predetermined privilege in the game is given by passing through,
A discharge unit (discharge port 627), which is opened to the front of the gaming machine, is connected to a passage extending in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and discharges game balls passing through the passage to an upstream side of the first region;
An entrance (entrance 626) connected to the passage;
A first distribution unit (stage 625) for distributing a game ball to the entrance or the outside of the entrance;
With
The gaming machine, wherein the window is the discharge unit.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 74, the window portion is a discharge portion that discharges the game balls distributed to the entrance portion by the first distribution portion to an upstream side of the first region. Therefore, at least a part of the result display portion is visually recognized at a point where the discharge portion faces from the front side of the gaming machine, so that the player can pay attention to the superiority of discharging the game ball from the discharge portion. Can be.

  Note that the “predetermined privilege in the game” in the feature 74 is exemplified by a right of various lotteries given based on passing, a grant of a game value such as a prize ball, and the like. The provision of a game value such as a prize ball given based on passing is, for example, a prize ball given based on passing (entering) the general prize device 639.

<Feature 75>
A gaming machine according to feature 73 or 74,
The display change unit causes the content corresponding to the predetermined result indicated by the information formed on the result display unit to be visually recognized as the content indicating the side of the first area instead of the content corresponding to the result. A gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 75, when the entrance portion or the discharge portion of the first distribution portion faces the gaming machine front side, the content indicating the side of the first region is visually recognized. Therefore, the player can associate the entry section or the ejection section with the first area based on the visual recognition content, and thereby, the game ball entered the entry section or the game ball ejected from the ejection section. In contrast, the player can have a sense of expectation regarding the privilege obtained by passing through the first area.

<Feature 80>
A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball flows through a predetermined entrance,
Lottery means (a part of the main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition (start special winning of the first special symbol) or the second predetermined condition (start special winning of the second special symbol) is satisfied;
A display device (a special symbol display device 471, 472) that performs variable display when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displays result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result after the variable display. , Decorative pattern display devices 479, 779),
If another predetermined condition is satisfied while the variable display is being executed by the display device, the variable display is executed a predetermined maximum number of times (the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the second predetermined condition is satisfied) in response to the other predetermined condition being satisfied. Holding means (a part of the main control board 920) capable of holding up to 4 times for each of
A first starting portion (lower middle starting winning device 431) that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters,
A second starting unit (right starting winning device 432) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and satisfies the second predetermined condition when the game ball enters;
A variable prize unit (central prize winning device 434) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player when the game ball enters;
Game state control means (one of the main control board 920) for controlling at least the ease of entry of the game balls in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game balls in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. Part), and
As the gaming state,
A normal gaming state in which the first starting section establishes the first predetermined condition and plays a game;
A prize-winning game state (special game state) that occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal game state and includes a period in which the variable prize section takes a state in which game balls easily enter;
Including one or more fluctuation displays executed after the easy winning game state and displaying the result information after the one or more fluctuation displays, the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery non-winning (losing) is displayed. When the game state is displayed until the predetermined upper limit number of games is reached, the game state transits to another game state, and the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery winning (big hit) is displayed as the result information. An advantageous gaming state in which a gaming state to which the transition is made after the result information is displayed is determined by a condition in which transition to an advantageous gaming state is easier for the player than the first predetermined condition in the normal gaming state is satisfied. ,
As the advantageous game state, a first advantageous game state (short-term time-saving game state) and a second advantageous game state (long-term time-short game state) more advantageous to the player than the first game state are provided,
The game state control means,
A normal entry control (control of the right starting winning device 432 in a non-time saving state) for controlling the ease of entry of a game ball into the second starting portion during the normal game state, and the normal game during the advantageous game state. Performing easy entry control (control of the right starting winning device 432 in a time-saving state) in which an easy entry state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting unit from the state is performed.
As the first winning type (big hit type according to the first special symbol) corresponding to the gaming state to which the state changes when the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the predetermined lottery is won,
A winning type (first big hit 2,5) that transits to the first advantageous gaming state according to a first selecting condition (selection condition in a non-time saving state) corresponding to the normal gaming state;
Winning types (first big hits 1 to 5) that transition to the second advantageous game state according to second selection conditions (selection conditions in the time saving state) corresponding to the first advantageous game state are provided,
As the second winning type (big hit type according to the second special symbol) corresponding to a gaming state to which a transition is made when the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the predetermined lottery is won,
A gaming machine, characterized in that a winning type (second big hit 1, 2) for transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state is provided in both the normal gaming state and the first advantageous gaming state.

  In a conventional gaming machine, a game ball enters the starting port as a normal game, and if a jackpot is won by a lottery based on the ball entry, a special game state is established, and in the special game state, a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening. Is known. Also, in this type of gaming machine, after the special gaming state, the winning probability of a big hit is higher than the normal gaming state, a certain-variable gaming state, a gaming state in which a game ball can easily enter the starting port from the normal gaming state, and the like. There are also known ones that add a variety of games.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to transition to an advantageous gaming state based on a lottery result performed by entry of a game ball into the starting port, and therefore, to transition to an advantageous gaming state. There is a problem that it is easy to become a uniform game such as emphasizing a lottery result every time.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably adding a gaming property of transitioning to an advantageous gaming state by establishment of a plurality of starting conditions. In other words, the game ball to the second starting unit is provided while having a game property that the game ball is stepped into the second advantageous game state via the first advantageous gaming state by a plurality of times of the entering of the gaming ball to the first starting unit. , The game property of transitioning to the second advantageous game state based on one lottery result can be added.

  Further, if the execution of the variable display is suspended by the suspending means when the transition to the first advantageous gaming state is made by the entry of the gaming ball to the first first starting portion, the suspension is performed after the easy winning winning gaming state. A fluctuating display in which a lottery result indicating whether or not to transition to another game state by a lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the subsequent first starting unit is displayed as result information can be started. In this case, since the game state to be transitioned from the normal game state to the other game state is determined according to a condition that is advantageous to the player, the player displays the change display before the easy winning game state. It is possible to give a great expectation to a gaming state that is more advantageous than when expecting the result information for the game, and to provide a game property for watching the display of the result information corresponding to the winning. Therefore, it is possible to add a gaming property that expands a sense of expectation of transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state step by step.

  In addition, when a plurality of game balls enter the first starting unit and transition to the second advantageous game state via the first advantageous game state, result information indicating whether or not to transition to the second advantageous game state is displayed. An easy winning game state occurs before the display, and the player can be given a predetermined game value by entering a game ball into the variable winning portion during the transition. For this reason, in a case where the game is not won while expecting the transition to the second advantageous game state, it is possible to easily continue the game in expectation of winning the first starting portion again.

  In addition, if the execution of the variable display is not suspended by the suspending means when the transition to the first advantageous gaming state due to the entry of the gaming ball into the first first starting portion, the gaming state control means causes the easy winning winning gaming state to be set. Later, by the easy entry control, it is possible to generate an easy entry state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting portion. For this reason, the execution of the fluctuation display for expecting the transition to the second advantageous game state is promptly performed, the game proceeds smoothly, and the player's mood drops due to spending a lot of time until the predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be suppressed.

  In the description of the feature 80, the first advantageous game state is an advantageous game state in which the upper limit game number is set to a first number of one or more, and the second advantageous game state is an upper limit game number of the first number. It may be the advantageous game state that is set to a larger second number of times, whereby a plurality of start-ups can be performed by a simple control in which the initial set value of the number of times in the advantageous game state is changed depending on the length of the upper limit number of games. It is possible to add a gaming property that suitably transitions to an advantageous gaming state by the satisfaction of the condition.

<Feature 81>
The gaming machine according to feature 80,
A third starting unit that is provided upstream or downstream of the first starting unit separately from the second starting unit, and that satisfies the second predetermined condition;
The lottery means performs a lottery under the condition of winning with the same probability when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state and when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 80, in the normal gaming state, the player can perform a game with no operation change aiming at the advancing of the gaming ball to both the first starting portion and the third starting portion. The first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition in which a lottery having different transition patterns to the second advantageous gaming state are performed can be simultaneously expected.

<Feature 82>
The gaming machine according to feature 81,
The display device can perform a variable display in a common display mode when the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state and when the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state. And a display device capable of displaying result information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery in a common display mode after the variable display.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 82, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state can be expressed in a common manner even when different starting conditions are satisfied in different gaming states, so that the player can make the transition. It can be easily understood that the advantageous game states that can be performed are common. Further, even if the establishment of the first predetermined condition in the first advantageous gaming state and the establishment of the second predetermined condition in the normal gaming state are rarely set with a very low probability, By satisfying another predetermined condition, it is possible to allow the user to experience the mode of the variable display in advance. For this reason, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the situation of the game is confused due to the accidental establishment of the predetermined condition without knowing the situation.

<Feature 90>
A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball flows through a predetermined entrance,
Lottery means (a part of the main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition (start special winning of the first special symbol) or the second predetermined condition (start special winning of the second special symbol) is satisfied;
A display device (a special symbol display device 471, 472) that performs variable display when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displays result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result after the variable display. , Decorative pattern display devices 479, 779),
If another predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the variable display by the display device, a holding unit (main control board 920) capable of holding the execution of the variable display for the satisfaction of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times. Part),
A first starting portion (lower middle starting winning device 431) that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters,
A second starting unit (right starting winning device 432) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and satisfies the second predetermined condition when the game ball enters;
A variable prize unit (central prize winning device 434) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player when the game ball enters;
Game state control means (one of the main control board 920) for controlling at least the ease of entry of the game balls in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game balls in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. Part), and
As the gaming state,
A normal gaming state in which the first starting section establishes the first predetermined condition and plays a game;
A prize-winning game state (special game state) that occurs when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal game state and includes a period in which the variable prize section takes a state in which game balls easily enter;
Including one or more fluctuation displays executed after the easy winning game state and displaying the result information after the one or more fluctuation displays, the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery non-winning (losing) is displayed. When the game state is displayed until the predetermined upper limit number of games is reached, the game state transits to another game state, and the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery winning (big hit) is displayed as the result information. An advantageous gaming state in which a gaming state to which the transition is made after the result information is displayed is determined by a condition in which transition to an advantageous gaming state is easier for the player than the first predetermined condition in the normal gaming state is satisfied. ,
The game state control means,
Normal entry control for controlling the ease of entry of a game ball into the second starting portion during the normal game state, and a game ball entering the second start portion from the normal game state during the advantageous game state. Easy access control to generate an easy access easy state,
When the fluctuation display of the number of times reaching the upper limit number of games is executed in the advantageous game state, control is performed to generate a state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting unit by the normal entry control. Gaming machine to do.

  In a conventional gaming machine, during a normal gaming state, a game ball enters the starting opening to be a start winning, a variable display is executed, and if a lottery is won by a lottery based on the starting winning, a big hit is won. There is known a configuration in which a special game state is set after a corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the special game state, a large number of game balls can be won in a winning opening. Further, in this type of gaming machine, when another start winning is generated during execution of the variable display based on the start winning, the execution of the variable display for the other start winning can be suspended up to a predetermined maximum number of times. A configuration having a hold function is also known. Furthermore, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, the winning probability of a big hit becomes a probable changing gaming state higher than the ordinary gaming state, or the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the starting port from the ordinary gaming state. There is also known a game in which such a game state can be continued up to a predetermined upper limit of the number of games, thereby diversifying the game.

  In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the control of the game that transitions between a plurality of types of gaming states.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing the control of a game that transitions between a plurality of types of gaming states. That is, in a state where the fluctuation display of the number of times reaching the upper limit number of games is performed in the advantageous game state, as a control for generating a state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting portion, not the easy entry control but the normal entry control. Is selected. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the entry of the game ball into the second starting unit during the execution of the fluctuation display of the number of times that has reached the upper limit number of games, so that the second starting unit is reduced to a number close to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous game state. It is possible to easily suppress the number of game balls entering the game. Therefore, a game between the first starting unit and the second starting unit, for example, in a case where the game ball enters the second starting unit more easily than the first starting unit and extremely easily transitions to a gaming state advantageous to the player. It is possible to preferably make a transition between game states in a situation where there is a difference in state transition conditions.

<Feature 91>
The gaming machine according to feature 90,
As the advantageous game state, a first advantageous game state (short-term time-saving game) set to a first upper limit number of times equal to or less than the maximum number of times the execution of the variable display can be suspended by the suspending means. State) is provided,
The game state control means, as the easy entry control, generates the easy access state when a predetermined easy access condition (normal symbol lottery winning) is satisfied, and generates the easy access state after generating the easy access state. If the same number of game balls as the first upper limit number of games are detected to enter into the second starting portion, the state is shifted to an entry prohibition state in which the game balls are prohibited from entering the second starting portion, and the entry prohibition state is set. A game machine characterized by performing a control for generating a state in which a game ball easily enters the second starting section by the normal entry control after the transition to (2).

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 91, a sufficient unit gaming right can be reserved before the start of the first advantageous gaming state, so that the game machine transitions to the first advantageous gaming state and ends. It is possible to generate a situation in which the game ball does not need to enter the game area during the period up to. For this reason, in the first advantageous gaming state, the player can concentrate his or her consciousness on the displayed fluctuation and the display of the result information without performing the operation of entering the game ball into the gaming area, and the second advantageous The expectation of the transition to the gaming state can be easily increased.

  In the first advantageous game state, in the situation where the variable display of the number of times reaching the upper limit number of games is being performed, the control for the second starting unit is performed by the normal entry control, so that the operation of entering the game ball into the game area is performed. Even if it is not performed, the player is not likely to be disadvantaged, and it is possible to easily ensure fairness among players depending on whether or not the entry operation is performed.

  In addition, in the description of the feature 91, it is preferable to set the first upper limit number of games to one, so that even if the execution of the variable display is held by the holding means even for one time, the first advantageous game state is set. The required right of the unit game can be secured by the end, and the winning condition of the predetermined lottery for one time can be easily set high. Therefore, the length of the first advantageous gaming state can be summarized in a short time, and the expectation of the transition from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state can be maximized.

  Further, instead of the description of the easy entry control in the feature 91, the game state control means sets the first upper limit number of games as the easy entry control when a predetermined entry facilitation condition (winning of the ordinary symbol lottery) is established. The same number of game balls may be set to the maximum allowable number to generate the easy entry state.

<Feature 92>
In the gaming machine according to feature 90 or 91,
The game state control means is configured to execute the time reduction state when the execution of the fluctuation display for the upper limit number of games constituting the advantageous game state is suspended by the suspension means at a timing when the short time reduction game state is started. After the start, the easy entry control causes the one game ball to transition to the non-time saving state in a short time in which it is impossible to enter the second starting portion, and the normal entry control causes the game ball to enter the second starting portion. A gaming machine characterized by performing control for generating a state that is easy to perform.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature 92, when the execution of the fluctuation display for the upper limit number of games constituting the advantageous gaming state is suspended by the retaining means at the timing when the short-term time-saving gaming state is started, it is easy to enter. Depending on the control, the game ball cannot enter the second starting portion. For this reason, in the short-time and short-time gaming state, it is easy to generate a situation in which the player is not likely to be disadvantaged even without performing the operation of entering the gaming ball into the gaming area, and a sense of expectation of transition to the second advantageous gaming state is provided. Can be easily increased.

<Feature A0>
A game area in which a game ball flows down through a predetermined entrance is provided, and a player can change a flow start position in the game area so as to be changeable, and the game area has a predetermined first operation state ( A first downflow area (a downflow area on the left side of the central structure 420) in which the game ball flows down according to the left-hitting game state) and a second downflow area different from the first downflow area and different from the first operation state. A gaming machine provided with a second flow-down area (a flow-down area on the right side of the central structure 420) in which a game ball flows down in two operation states (right-handed game state),
Lottery means (a part of the main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition (start special winning of the first special symbol) or the second predetermined condition (start special winning of the second special symbol) is satisfied;
A display device (variable symbol display device 471, 472, special symbol display device 471, 472) that performs variable display when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displays result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery result after the variable display. Decorative pattern display devices 479, 779),
If another predetermined condition is satisfied while the variable display is being executed by the display device, the variable display is executed a predetermined maximum number of times (the first predetermined condition is satisfied and the second predetermined condition is satisfied) in response to the other predetermined condition being satisfied. Holding means (a part of the main control board 920) capable of holding up to 4 times for each of
A first starting portion (lower middle starting winning device 431) provided in the first flow-down area and satisfying the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters;
A second starting unit that is provided in the second downflow area, takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and satisfies the predetermined lottery condition when the game ball enters;
A variable prize unit (central prize winning device 434) that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value (prize ball) to the player when the game ball enters;
Game state control means (one of the main control board 920) for controlling at least the ease of entry of the game balls in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game balls in the variable winning portion to generate a plurality of types of game states. Department) and
In each game state controlled by the game state control means, operation instruction information output means (one of the main control board 920) which outputs operation instruction information corresponding to execution of a game in the first operation state or the second operation state. , A decorative design display device 479, a light-emitting body of the central structure 420, and acoustic devices 281 and 282).
As the gaming state,
A first side gaming state in which it is advantageous for the player to make the first downflow area flow down from the second downflow area,
A prize-winning game state that includes a period in which the variable prize portion takes a state in which a game ball easily enters, which is generated when the predetermined lottery is won,
Including one or more variable display executed after the winning easy gaming state and displaying the result information after the one or more variable display, the result information corresponding to the non-winning of the predetermined lottery is predetermined. In the gaming state in which the state is shifted to the first side gaming state when displayed until the upper limit number of games is reached, and when the result information corresponding to the predetermined lottery winning is displayed as the result information, the first state is displayed. An advantageous gaming state in which a gaming state to which the transition is made after the result information is displayed is determined by a condition that makes it easier for the player to transition to an advantageous gaming state than the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition in the side gaming state. ,
The operation instruction information output means,
First operation instruction information output means for outputting first operation instruction information corresponding to execution of a game in the first operation state during the first side game state;
A second operation instruction information output unit that outputs second operation instruction information corresponding to execution of a game in the second operation state during the special game state and the advantageous game state;
Before the end of the special game state, or before the end of the advantageous game state, the execution of the variable display for the remaining number of times or more required before reaching the upper limit number of games in the advantageous game state to which the transition is made thereafter A gaming machine comprising: a second operation instruction non-output unit that generates a period during which the second operation instruction information is not output when the second operation instruction information is not held by the holding unit.

  In a conventional gaming machine, during a normal gaming state, a game ball enters the starting opening to be a start winning, a variable display is executed, and if a lottery is won by a lottery based on the starting winning, a big hit is won. There is known a configuration in which a special game state is set after a corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the special game state, a large number of game balls can be won in a winning opening. Further, in this type of gaming machine, when another start winning is generated during execution of the variable display based on the start winning, the execution of the variable display for the other start winning can be suspended up to a predetermined maximum number of times. A configuration having a hold function is also known. Furthermore, in this type of gaming machine, after entering the special gaming state, the winning probability of a big hit becomes a probable changing gaming state higher than the ordinary gaming state, or the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the starting port from the ordinary gaming state. There is also known a game in which such a game state can be continued up to a predetermined upper limit of the number of games, thereby diversifying the game.

  In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is preferable that the gaming machine maker side appropriately make the player recognize the operation related to the game when transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states, and there is still room for improvement.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature A0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to appropriately recognize an operation related to a game when transitioning between a plurality of types of gaming states. That is, before the end of the special game state or before the end of the advantageous game state, the execution of the variable display for the remaining number of times or more required until the upper limit number of games is reached in the advantageous game state is suspended by the suspending means. In, the predetermined condition for the variable display required until the advantageous game state is completed without the player already playing the game in the second operation state is satisfied. In this case, a period during which the second operation instruction information is not output by the second operation instruction non-output means is generated, so that a variable display more than is required for the player to execute the advantageous game state is aimed at. It is possible to avoid a situation where extra game balls are consumed.

<Feature A1>
The gaming machine according to feature A0,
A second operation for outputting second operation instruction inhibition information for at least not executing a game in the second operation state during a period in which the second operation instruction non-output means does not output the second operation instruction information. A gaming machine comprising a prohibition information output means.

  According to the gaming machine described in the feature A1, it is possible to easily indicate to the player that the execution of the game in the second operation state is unnecessary.

  Note that at least one feature described in the features 10 to A1 may be applied in combination with any other or a plurality of features. Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko machine: launch operation means operated by a player, game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, a passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine, comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a game area; wherein a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player is operated according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for a game machine such as a ball game machine.

  100: gaming machine, 281, 282: sound device, 431: lower middle starting winning device, 432: right starting winning device, 434: central large winning device, 471, 472: special symbol display device, 479, 779: decorative symbol Display device, 611B: roof, 612A, 613A ... decoration part, 612D, 613D ... projection part, 620 ... passage opening, 622C ... stage, 623 ... flow down regulation part, 639 ... general prize winning device, 652 ... left flow down passage, 653 ... Right downflow passage, 652A, 653A: recess, 920: main control board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a game area in which a game ball flows through a predetermined entrance,
Lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied;
A display device capable of performing variable display when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and displaying result information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery after the variable display;
When another predetermined condition is satisfied during the execution of the variable display by the display device, a holding unit capable of holding the execution of the variable display for the satisfaction of the other predetermined condition up to a predetermined maximum number of times,
A first starting unit that satisfies the first predetermined condition when a game ball enters,
A second starting unit that takes a plurality of states where the ease of entry of the game ball is different, and satisfies the second predetermined condition when the game ball enters;
A variable winning section that takes a plurality of states in which the ease of entry of the game ball is different and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the game ball enters,
Game state control means for generating at least a plurality of types of game states by controlling at least the ease of entry of the game balls in the second starting portion and the ease of entry of the game balls in the variable winning portion,
As the gaming state,
A normal gaming state in which the first starting section establishes the first predetermined condition and plays a game;
A prize-winning gaming state that includes a period in which the variable prize portion takes a state in which a gaming ball easily enters, generated when the predetermined lottery is won in the normal gaming state;
Including one or more variable display executed after the winning easy gaming state and displaying the result information after the one or more variable display, the result information corresponding to the non-winning of the predetermined lottery is predetermined. A game state where the game state transits to another game state when displayed until the upper limit number of games is reached,
When the result information corresponding to the winning of the predetermined lottery is displayed as the result information, the result information is determined by a condition that makes it easier for the player to transition to a gaming state more advantageous than the establishment of the first predetermined condition in the normal gaming state. And an advantageous game state in which a transitioning game state after is displayed is provided,
The game state control means,
Normal entry control for controlling the ease of entry of a game ball into the second starting portion during the normal game state, and a game ball entering the second start portion from the normal game state during the advantageous game state. Easy access control to generate an easy access easy state,
When the fluctuation display of the number of times reaching the upper limit number of games is performed in the advantageous game state, the easy entry of the game ball to the second starting portion is controlled by the normal entry control,
At the start of the advantageous gaming state, when the execution of the variable display is suspended in the suspension means, and when the suspension display is not suspended, different control is performed,
When the execution of the variable display is not suspended in the suspension means at the start of the advantageous gaming state, the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the easy entry control, and the advantageous gaming state is controlled. When the game ball enters the second starting unit after the start of the first variation display, the first variation display is started, and immediately after the start of the first variation display or until a certain time has elapsed from the start of the first variation display. During the period, the ease of entry of the game ball into the second starting portion is controlled by the easy entry control, and after the period has elapsed and before the first variable display ends, the normal entry A gaming machine characterized by controlling the ease with which a game ball enters the second starting section by control.